WO2023179526A9 - 显示设备 - Google Patents

显示设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023179526A9
WO2023179526A9 PCT/CN2023/082449 CN2023082449W WO2023179526A9 WO 2023179526 A9 WO2023179526 A9 WO 2023179526A9 CN 2023082449 W CN2023082449 W CN 2023082449W WO 2023179526 A9 WO2023179526 A9 WO 2023179526A9
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
backlight
display device
elastic support
support member
display panel
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/082449
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2023179526A1 (zh
Inventor
李奎宝
李建春
程旭
Original Assignee
海信视像科技股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 海信视像科技股份有限公司 filed Critical 海信视像科技股份有限公司
Publication of WO2023179526A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023179526A1/zh
Publication of WO2023179526A9 publication Critical patent/WO2023179526A9/zh

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336—Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133602—Direct backlight
    • G02F1/133608—Direct backlight including particular frames or supporting means
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308—Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • G02F1/133314—Back frames
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308—Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • G02F1/133317—Intermediate frames, e.g. between backlight housing and front frame
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/06—Loudspeakers
    • H04R9/066—Loudspeakers using the principle of inertia

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of display technology, and in particular, to a display device.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a display device, including a display panel for displaying image information; a backlight module including a backlight plate and an optical film assembly, and the backlight plate includes a backlight plate body and a light source.
  • the display panel is located on the light exit side of the optical film component, and the backlight panel is located on the light entrance side of the optical film component.
  • the edge of the display panel is connected to the edge of the backlight panel body, so that the display A gas layer is formed between the panel and the backlight plate body, and the light source is located in the gas layer; a backplane is provided on a side of the backlight module away from the display panel for Support the backlight module and the display panel; an actuator, the actuator includes an actuator body and an actuator, the actuator is connected to the backlight panel body and is used to drive the backlight panel The backlight plate body vibrates, and the vibration of the backlight plate body is transmitted to the display panel through the gas layer, so as to drive the display panel to vibrate and produce sound.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram 2 of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram three of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a cross-sectional view of a display device at the position of an actuator according to some embodiments of the present application
  • Figure 5 is another cross-sectional view of the display device at the position of the actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is another cross-sectional view of the display device at the position of the actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application when filling bumps are provided in the gas layer;
  • Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of the expansion and contraction of the second elastic support member in the gas layer in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic structural diagram of the second elastic support member and the backlight plate in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is another structural schematic diagram of the second elastic support member and the backlight plate in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of the second elastic support member in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application when it is adsorbed and fixed;
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the display device in some embodiments of the present application when the two ends of the second elastic support member are fixed in different ways;
  • Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of the second elastic support member in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 14 is another structural schematic diagram of the second elastic support member in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 15 is another structural schematic diagram of the second elastic support member in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 16 is another structural schematic diagram of the second elastic support member in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application when an anti-wear component is provided between the diffusion film and the fluorescent film;
  • Figure 18 is another structural schematic diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application when an anti-wear component is provided between the diffusion film and the fluorescent film;
  • Figure 19 is another structural schematic diagram when an anti-wear component is provided between the diffusion film and the fluorescent film in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application;
  • Figure 20 is a schematic structural diagram of the second elastic support member connected to the first connecting member in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application;
  • Figure 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a second elastic support member disposed between two adjacent backlight panels in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 22 is another structural schematic diagram when the second elastic support member is disposed between two adjacent backlight panels in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application;
  • Figure 23A is a schematic diagram of the distribution of second elastic supports in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 23B is a schematic diagram of a first arrangement of second elastic supports provided on multiple backlight panels of a display device according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram of a second arrangement of second elastic supports provided on multiple backlight panels of a display device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 24A is a schematic diagram of the splicing structure of multiple backlight panels of the display device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 24B is a cross-sectional view of the display device in Figure 24A;
  • Figure 25 is a schematic structural diagram of the second elastic support members provided on multiple backlight panels of the display device according to the embodiment of the present application in a static state;
  • Figure 26 is a schematic structural diagram of the compressed state of the second elastic support members provided on multiple backlight panels of the display device provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 27 is a schematic structural diagram of the free contact state of the second elastic support members provided on multiple backlight panels of the display device provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 28 is a schematic structural diagram of the backlight panel and isolation strips in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 29 is another structural schematic diagram of the backlight panel and isolation strips in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 30 is a schematic structural diagram of an air guide channel being provided at the connection position between the display panel and the backlight plate body of the display device according to some embodiments of the present application;
  • Figure 31 is a front view of the rubber strip when part A in Figure 30 is partially enlarged;
  • Figure 32 is a schematic structural diagram when the filter element is installed in Figure 31;
  • Figure 33 is a schematic structural diagram of the display device in some embodiments of the present application when the actuator is connected to the rear case;
  • Figure 34 is another structural schematic diagram of the display device in some embodiments of the present application when the actuator is connected to the rear case;
  • Figure 35 is a schematic structural diagram when the vibration stabilizer is installed in Figure 33;
  • Figure 36 is a schematic structural diagram when the vibration stabilizer is installed in Figure 34;
  • Figure 37 is a schematic structural diagram of a vibration stabilizer in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 38 is a schematic structural diagram when the elastic filter element is installed in Figure 31;
  • Figure 39 is another structural schematic diagram when the elastic filter element is installed in Figure 31;
  • Figure 40 is a schematic structural diagram when the elastic filter element is installed in Figure 34;
  • Figure 41 is another structural schematic diagram when the elastic filter element is installed in Figure 34;
  • Figure 42 is another structural schematic diagram of the mounting component in Figure 31 when it is connected to the back shell;
  • Figure 43 is another structural schematic diagram of the mounting component in Figure 34 when it is connected to the back shell;
  • Figure 44 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device equipped with a rear case actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 45 is another schematic structural diagram of a display device equipped with a rear case exciter according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 46 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application when reinforcing ribs are provided on the rear shell;
  • Figure 47 is a schematic structural diagram of the display device in some embodiments of the present application when the back case is provided with multiple sub-back cases;
  • Figure 48 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the rear shell and the backplane in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 49 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 50 is a schematic cross-sectional view 2 of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 51 is a schematic cross-sectional view three of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 52 is a schematic cross-sectional view 4 of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view 5 of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view six of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 56 is another cross-sectional view of the display device at the position of the actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 57 is another cross-sectional view of the display device at the position of the actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 58 is another cross-sectional view of the display device at the position of the actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 59 is another cross-sectional view of the display device at the position of the actuator according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 60 is another structural schematic diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 61 is another structural schematic diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 62 is another structural schematic diagram of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 63 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device equipped with a high-frequency speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 64 is a schematic diagram of the control of the exciter and speaker in Figure 63;
  • Figure 65 is a schematic structural diagram of the high-frequency speaker in Figure 63 when a phase plug is installed;
  • Figure 66 is a schematic structural diagram of the high-frequency speaker in Figure 64;
  • Figure 67 is a schematic diagram of sound wave propagation in Figure 63;
  • Figure 68 is another control schematic diagram of the exciter and speaker in Figure 63;
  • Figure 69 is a schematic structural diagram of a high-frequency speaker installed on the support of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 70 is a schematic structural diagram of a name identification component and a sound driver of a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 71 is another structural schematic diagram of an actuator in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 72 is another structural schematic diagram of an actuator in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 73 is another structural schematic diagram of an actuator in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 74 is a cross-sectional view of the exciter in Figure 73;
  • Figure 75 is a schematic structural diagram of the backlight plate and reinforcement plate in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 76 is a schematic diagram of the positioning of the backlight plate and the reinforcement plate in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 77 is a schematic structural diagram of multiple backlight panels in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 78 is another structural schematic diagram of multiple backlight panels in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 79 is another structural schematic diagram of multiple backlight panels in a display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 80 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device in some embodiments of the present application when no reinforcing plate is provided on the backlight board of the display device;
  • Figure 81 is another schematic diagram of the positioning of the backlight plate and the reinforcement plate in the display device according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 82 is a schematic cross-sectional view 8 of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 83 is a schematic cross-sectional view 9 of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • display devices can use speakers to emit sound.
  • the speakers are generally placed on the lower side or back side of the display device. This allows sound to be emitted from the bottom or rear of the display device.
  • the display device can use an exciter to drive the display panel to vibrate and produce sound.
  • OLED Organic Light Emitting Diode
  • the display panel of the OLED display equipment includes an organic self-luminous layer.
  • the actuator can be directly connected to the display panel and drive the display panel to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the display panel itself does not emit light and needs a backlight to emit light.
  • the imaging principle of the LCD is to place the liquid crystal between two pieces of conductive glass and rely on the electric field between the two electrodes.
  • the drive causes the liquid crystal molecules to twist the nematic electric field effect to control the transmission or shielding function of the backlight, thereby displaying the image. If a color filter is added, color images can be displayed. It can be seen that the backlight cannot be blocked, and there is a gas gap between the display panel and the backlight. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device cannot drive the display panel to vibrate and make sound through the exciter.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a display device in which an actuator can pass through the gap between the display panel and the backlight panel.
  • the gas layer drives the display panel to vibrate and produce sound, which has good acoustic effects and makes it easy to integrate audio and video.
  • the display device 10 is a liquid crystal display device.
  • the display device 10 includes a display panel 100 , a backlight module 200 , a backplane 300 and an actuator 400 .
  • the display panel 100 is used to display text, images and other image information.
  • the display panel 100 includes touch glass and a liquid crystal screen.
  • the touch glass and the liquid crystal screen are stacked in sequence along the thickness direction of the display device 10 .
  • the display device 10 has a sky side, a ground side, a left side, a right side, and a front side and a back side.
  • the left and right sides of the display device 10 refer to the left and right sides of the user when the user faces the side of the touch glass and performs a touch operation.
  • the side of the display device 10 facing the user is the front side
  • the side of the display device 10 facing away from the user is the rear side
  • the upper side of the display device 10 is the sky side
  • the lower side of the display device 10 is the ground side.
  • the touch glass is arranged on the front side of the LCD screen to protect the LCD screen.
  • the LCD screen is set on the back side of the touch glass.
  • the LCD screen includes a Color Filter (CF) substrate, a Thin Film Transistor (TFT) substrate (also called an array substrate), and a Liquid Crystal (LC, Liquid Crystal) layer.
  • the liquid crystal layer is located between the color filter substrate and the array substrate.
  • data lines and scan lines are provided on the thin film transistor substrate.
  • the liquid crystal molecules are controlled to change direction by whether the data lines and scan lines are energized or not, so that the light from the light source 212 is emitted through the color filter substrate and a picture of a preset color is generated.
  • the backlight module 200 includes a backlight panel 210, which is used to generate light.
  • the backlight panel 210 includes a backlight panel body 211 and a light source 212.
  • the backlight panel body 211 can be an aluminum plate, a printed circuit board (Printed Circuit Board, PCB), etc.
  • the light source 212 may be a light-emitting diode (Light-Emitting Diode, LED), a sub-millimeter light-emitting diode (Mini-Light Emitting Diode, Mini LED) or a micron-level light-emitting diode (Micro-Light Emitting Diode, Micro LED).
  • the number of light sources 212 may be multiple and spaced apart on the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the size of the display device 10 is usually larger than the size of the backlight panel 210 , that is, the number of backlight panels 210 is usually multiple.
  • Backlight panel 210 array setup For example, please refer to FIG. 3 , the display device 10 includes three backlight panels 210 , and the three backlight panels 210 are arranged along the lateral direction of the display device 10 .
  • the backlight module 200 also includes an optical film component 220 , the display panel 100 is located on the light exit side of the optical film component 220 , and the backlight plate 210 is located on the light entrance side of the optical film component 220 . That is, the display panel 100 , the optical film assembly 220 and the backlight plate 210 are stacked along the thickness direction of the display device 10 .
  • the optical film assembly 220 can be of different types.
  • the optical film component 220 may include a reflective sheet, a light guide plate, a brightness enhancement film, etc.
  • the reflective sheet is mounted on the side of the backlight plate body 211 where the light source 212 is disposed.
  • the reflective sheet can reflect the light generated by the light source 212 in the light emitting direction, thereby uniformly distributing the light emitted by the light source 212 .
  • the light guide plate can use refraction and total reflection to emit the light on the light entrance side on the light exit side, converting the linear light source into a surface light source.
  • the optical film assembly 220 may include a diffusion film 222, a fluorescent film 221, and a brightness enhancement film 223 stacked in sequence.
  • the diffusion film 222 is disposed on the front side of the light source 212, that is, on the side facing the backlight plate 210.
  • the user mixes the light from multiple light sources 212 evenly, that is, converts the point light source 212 into an area light source 212.
  • the fluorescent film 221 converts the light emitted by the light source 212 into white light. In this way, the color of the light emitted by the light source 212 is not limited, and the light source 212 can emit blue light or purple light.
  • the brightness enhancement film 223 is used to increase the brightness of light.
  • the optical film component 220 may also include a diffusion film 222, a fluorescent film 221 and a brightness enhancement film 223.
  • the optical film component 220 includes a diffusion film 222, a fluorescence film 221 and a brightness enhancement film.
  • the bright film 223 is taken as an example for explanation.
  • the edge of the display panel 100 is sealingly connected to the edge of the backlight plate body 211 , which can be achieved by arranging sealing members, such as buffer double-sided adhesive strips, around the edges of the backlight plate 210 , so that the display panel 100 is connected to the edge of the backlight plate 211 .
  • a sealed gas layer M is formed between the backlight plate bodies 211 , and the light source 212 is located in the gas layer M.
  • the liquid crystal screen and the optical film assembly 220 can be pressed together to avoid air gaps between the liquid crystal screen, the brightness enhancement film 223, the fluorescent film 221 and the diffusion film 222 that can communicate with outside air. .
  • liquid crystal screen and the optical film assembly 220 can also be bonded and fixed in pairs, for example, through photosensitive glue (UV glue), foam, double-sided tape, or the like.
  • photosensitive glue UV glue
  • foam foam
  • double-sided tape or the like.
  • the display panel 100 and the optical film assembly 220 can be fixedly connected as a whole through adhesive bonding.
  • the gas layer M is formed between the optical film assembly 220 and the backlight plate body 211 .
  • the display device 10 includes a first adhesive member 810 with adhesiveness.
  • the first adhesive member 810 is double-sided tape or foam.
  • the first adhesive member 810 extends along the edge of the backlight plate body 211 and optically.
  • the film assembly 220 and the backlight plate body 211 are bonded and fixed through the first adhesive member 810 , that is, the diffusion film 222 and the backlight plate body 211 are bonded and fixed through the first adhesive member 810 .
  • a closed gas layer M is formed between the optical film assembly 220 and the backlight plate 210, and the gas layer M can be filled with air, nitrogen, etc.
  • the gas layer M is closed, that is, there is no mutual circulation between the gas layer M and the outside air.
  • the gas layer M can be equivalent to a damping spring for transmitting vibration between the backlight plate 210 and the display panel 100 .
  • the gap size of the gas layer M can be determined according to the size of the light source 212 .
  • the gap may be 0.3mm-10mm.
  • the gap of the gas layer M may be less than 1mm.
  • the gap of the gas layer M when the gap of the gas layer M is large, for example, when the gap is 4 mm to 10 mm, when the backlight plate body 211 vibrates, the sensitivity to changes in air pressure in the gas layer M is low.
  • fillers can be provided in the gas layer M to reduce the gas volume of the gas layer M and improve the sensitivity to air pressure changes, thereby achieving the purpose of improving the sound effect of the display panel 100 .
  • the filler can be fixedly connected to the backlight panel body 211, such as by bonding, snapping or screwing.
  • each filler can be bonded to the backlight plate body 211 through a second adhesive member 820 further included in the display device to avoid relative movement between each filler and the backlight plate body 211; wherein, the second The adhesive member 820 includes but is not limited to UV glue, foam double-sided tape, etc.
  • a snapping hole can also be provided on the backlight plate body 211 , one end of the filler is clipped in the snapping hole, and the other end of the filler extends toward one side of the display panel 100 to reduce the gap between the gas layer M .
  • the filler may be a high-density foam material with a small weight, such as melamine.
  • a reflective member can be attached to the surface of the filler or a reflective material can be sprayed to reduce the amount of light emitted by the light source 212 that the filler absorbs.
  • the diffusion film 222 and the light source 212 may be in contact with each other in the thickness direction of the display device 10. In this way, the gap between the gas layers M is smaller and the thickness of the display device 10 is smaller. At this time, the light source 212 can be made of soft packaging material to avoid noise caused by rigid collision between the diffusion film 222 and the light source 212 .
  • the diffusion film 222 may be spaced apart from the light source 212 to avoid a rigid collision between the diffusion film 222 and the light source 212 to generate noise.
  • the filler may be a sheet-like piece and is laid on the backlight plate body 211 .
  • a light source hole is opened at a position of the filler corresponding to the light source 212 for the light source 212 to pass through.
  • Figure a in Figure 7 is a front view of the backlight plate body 211
  • Figure b in Figure 7 is a side view of figure a.
  • the filler can also be a plurality of fillers.
  • the filling protrusion 901 is a columnar protrusion, multiple filling protrusions 901 are arranged at intervals, and the cross-sectional shape of the filling protrusion 901 can be cone, triangle, trapezoid, circle, ellipse, rectangle, etc.
  • the outline of the filling protrusion 901 along the cross-sectional shape of the vertical display panel 100 may be a straight line, an arc, a spline curve, or a curve extending in a stepped manner, or the like.
  • the filling protrusions 901 protrude from the surface of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100 and extend toward the display panel 100 side.
  • a plurality of filling protrusions 901 can be arranged in an array on the backlight plate body 211.
  • the backlight plate body 211 is rectangular, and a plurality of filling protrusions 901 are arranged on the backlight plate body 211. Arranged in a matrix.
  • each filling protrusion 901 may be disposed at the space between adjacent light sources 212, for example, The filling protrusion 901 is provided between any two adjacent light sources 212, or the filling protrusion 901 is provided between any four adjacent light sources 212, etc.
  • the filling protrusion 901 is located between adjacent light bars; when the light source 212 is a lamp bead, the filling protrusion 901 is located between any two lamp beads, or the filling protrusion 901 is located between Between any four adjacent lamp beads, etc.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the plurality of filling protrusions 901 on the backlight plate body 211 along the vertical display panel 100 and the outline of the cross-sectional shape may be the same or different.
  • the plurality of filling protrusions 901 may be the same or different.
  • 901 are arranged in a matrix, and the cross-sectional shapes of the filling protrusions 901 in each row or column can be the same, and the cross-sectional shapes of the filling protrusions 901 in adjacent rows can be the same or different.
  • the cross-sectional size of the filling protrusion 901 may be gradually reduced from one end of the backlight plate body 211 to one end of the diffusion film 222, for example , the filling protrusion 901 is arranged between any four adjacent light sources 212.
  • the filling protrusion 901 is a quadrangular pyramidal protrusion.
  • the light beam emitted by the light source 212 is adjacent to the outer wall of the filling protrusion 901, that is, the filling protrusion 901 is a square prism conical protrusion.
  • the starting point 901 is not disposed on the path of the light emitted from the light source 212 .
  • the protrusion height of the filling protrusion 901 is less than or equal to the gap of the gas layer M.
  • the gap of the gas layer M refers to the distance between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100
  • the protruding height of the filling protrusion 901 refers to the protruding backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel. 100 side extension height.
  • the protrusion height of the filling protrusion 901 protruding from the surface of the backlight plate body 211 is less than or equal to the gap of the gas layer M, so that the filling protrusion 901 can avoid the direct illumination range of the light source 212 .
  • the height of the filling protrusion 901 protruding from the surface of the backlight plate body 211 is less than the height of the light source 212 protruding from the surface of the backlight plate body 211 , so that the protrusion can avoid direct radiation from the light source 212 Light range.
  • the cross-section of the filling protrusion 901 (the cross-section is parallel to the display panel 100 ) gradually decreases in size. As shown in FIG. 7 , the filling protrusion 901 gradually decreases in size.
  • 901 is a square prism, an ellipsoid, etc., so that the filling protrusion 901 is located outside the direct illumination area of the light source 212 and reduces the impact of the filling protrusion 901 on the direct light of the light source 212.
  • each filling protrusion 901 protruding from the surface of the backlight plate body 211 may or may not be equal; in addition, the cross-sectional shapes of each filling protrusion 901 along the vertical display panel 100 may be the same. It can also be different. As shown in Figure 7, the cross-sectional shapes of the filling protrusions 901 along the vertical display panel 100 are different, and the protruding heights of the filling protrusions 901 protruding from the backlight plate body 211 are also not equal. This is to ensure that each filling protrusion 901 can avoid the direct illumination range of the adjacent light source 212 .
  • the filler close to the exciter can be compared with the filler far away from the excitation unit.
  • the fillers of the device have different cross-sectional shapes or different heights.
  • the filler with the exciter as the center, the closer the position is to the actuator, the filler can adopt a pyramid, cone and other structures with a larger height, while those farther away from the actuator The position can use an ellipsoid with a smaller height, etc.
  • the filler close to the exciter can be used to support the display panel, so that different positions of the display panel have a more uniform vibration amplitude, thereby improving The display effect of the display panel.
  • the filling protrusions 901 are arranged in four rows, and the filling protrusions 901 in adjacent rows have different cross-sectional shapes and heights, while the filling protrusions 901 in the same row have the same cross-sectional shape and height, for example , the height of the filling protrusion 901 close to the actuator is greater than the height of the filling protrusion 901 far away from the actuator, and the filling protrusion 901 close to the actuator can be used to support the display panel, so that different positions of the display panel have more uniform vibrations amplitude.
  • the arrangement, hardness, height, etc. of the filling protrusions 901 can be arbitrarily combined.
  • the filling protrusions 901 at different positions can be set to have different hardnesses; when multiple filling protrusions 901 are arranged in other forms than an array, the filling protrusions 901 can also be The filling protrusions 901 at different positions can be set to have different hardnesses and different heights at the same time.
  • the second elastic support member 900 moves from the backrest along the vertical height of the display panel 100 in its natural state.
  • the height of the second elastic support member 900 along the vertical direction of the display panel 100 in the natural state is greater than the maximum height of the gas layer M at its corresponding position. spacing.
  • the height of the second elastic support 900 required when the second elastic support 900 is separated from the diffusion film 222 or the backlight plate 210 is from the side close to the exciter body 410 to the side away from the excitation.
  • One side of the device body 410 gradually decreases.
  • the base height of the second elastic support member 900 can be based on the height of the second elastic support member 900 that is close to the exciter body 410. The lower the device body 410, the smaller the height of the second elastic support member 900.
  • each second elastic support member 900 between the diffusion film 222 and the backlight plate 210 can be positioned at a lower manufacturing cost.
  • the compression state of the interference fit prevents the second elastic support 900 located close to the actuator body 410 from being separated from the diffusion film 222 or the backlight plate 210.
  • the support effect between the diffusion film 222 and the backlight plate 210 is better.
  • the vibration transmission efficiency is high.
  • the distribution density of the second elastic support member 900 and the individual At least one of the support stiffnesses of the second elastic support member 900 gradually decreases from a side close to the actuator body 410 to a side away from the actuator body 410 . That is to say, the closer the position to the actuator body 410 is, the greater the support strength required for the optical film assembly 230 is, and the farther away from the actuator body 410 is, the smaller the support strength required for the optical film assembly 230 is.
  • at least one of the distribution density and support stiffness of the second elastic support member 900 is set differently.
  • the number of elastic support members 900 arranged is smaller.
  • the support stiffness of the second elastic support member 900 that is closer to the actuator 400 is greater, and the support stiffness of the second elastic support member 900 that is further away from the actuator 400 is smaller. . That is to say, the closer the position of the actuator body 410 is, the stronger the ability of the second elastic support member 900 to resist deformation, which can avoid elastic failure of the second elastic support member 900 due to excessive expansion and contraction, thereby causing the second elastic support member 900 to support failure and vibration transmission failure.
  • the distribution area and support stiffness of the second elastic support member 900 can be set differently, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the hardness of a single second elastic support member 900 is different from that of a single second elastic support member 900.
  • At least one of the cross-sectional areas of the second elastic support member 900 gradually decreases from a side close to the actuator body 410 to a side away from the actuator body 410 . That is to say, the closer the position to the actuator body 410 is, the greater the support strength required for the optical film assembly 230 is, and the farther away from the actuator body 410 is, the smaller the support strength required for the optical film assembly 230 is.
  • at least one of the hardness and the cross-sectional area of the second elastic support member 900 can also be set differently.
  • the second elastic support member 900 closer to the actuator body 410 has a greater hardness
  • the second elastic support member 900 farther away from the actuator 400 has a smaller hardness. That is to say, the closer the position of the actuator body 410 is, the stronger the ability of the second elastic support member 900 to resist deformation. In this way, the second elastic support member 900 can be effectively supported between the backlight plate 210 and the diffusion film 222.
  • the elastic support member 900 has better support effect and vibration transmission effect.
  • the cross-sectional area of the second elastic support member 900 that is closer to the actuator 400 is larger, and the cross-sectional area of the second elastic support member 900 that is farther away from the actuator 400 is larger.
  • the smaller the cross-sectional area also That is to say, the closer the position of the actuator body 410 is, the larger the cross-sectional size of the second elastic support member 900 is, and the less likely it is to undergo telescopic deformation. In this way, the second elastic support member 900 can effectively support the backlight plate 210 and the diffusion. Between the membranes 222, the second elastic support member 900 has better support effect and vibration transmission effect.
  • the hardness and cross-sectional area of the second elastic support member 900 can be set at different levels, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the height of the second elastic support member 900 along the vertical direction of the display panel 100 in the natural state, the distribution density of the second elastic support member 900 , the stiffness of a single second elastic support member 900 , the At least one of the hardness of the member 900 and the cross-sectional area of the single second elastic support member 900 gradually decreases from the side close to the actuator body 410 to the side away from the actuator body 410 to adapt to different assembly processes. demand, production costs, etc.
  • the display device 10 may also include a second elastic support member 900 .
  • the material of the second elastic support member 900 may be silicone or rubber.
  • the second elastic support member 900 may be made of silicone or rubber. There are multiple second elastic support members 900 , and the plurality of second elastic support members 900 are arranged at intervals.
  • the second elastic support member 900 is connected to the backlight plate 210 , and the other end is connected to the diffusion film 222 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be bonded and fixed with the backlight plate 210 through an adhesive member, such as UV glue, to prevent the second elastic support member 900 from moving relative to the backlight plate 210 .
  • both ends of the filling protrusion 901 can be fixedly connected to the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222. At this time, the filling protrusion 901 can be fixedly connected to the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222.
  • the base 901 can evolve into a second elastic support member 900 .
  • the display device may be provided with the filling protrusion 901 and the second elastic support member 900 at the same time.
  • the optical film assembly 220 and the backlight plate can be connected.
  • 210 are connected as a whole, that is, it can be equivalent to a single-layer screen to effectively transmit vibrations with high vibration transmission efficiency to avoid relative movement between the optical film assembly 220 and the backlight plate 210 due to an excessive gap in the gas layer M. .
  • the optical film assembly 220 will convert and homogenize the light generated by the light source 212, even if the second elastic support 900 is provided on the side of the backlight plate body 211 where the light source 212 is located, no shadows will be generated on the display panel 100.
  • the display panel 100 can have relatively uniform brightness. In this way, there are no restrictions on the shape and size of the filling protrusion 901, the shape of the second elastic support member 900, the contact area between the second elastic support member 900 and the diffusion film 222, and the like.
  • the cross-section of the second elastic support member 900 may be rectangular (as shown in FIG. 5 ), tapered (as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 ), trapezoidal, or dumbbell. shape (as shown in Figure 11), columnar or other shapes, etc.
  • the second elastic support member 900 may have a conical structure or a quadrangular pyramid structure, and the cross-sectional size of the second elastic support member 900 may gradually decrease from one end of the backlight plate body 211 to one end of the diffusion film 222 .
  • the light beam emitted by the light source 212 is adjacent to the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900, that is, the second elastic support member 900 is not disposed on the path of the light emitted by the light source 212. In this way, the brightness distribution of the display screen can be improved Relatively uniform.
  • the backlight plate body 211 or the diffusion film 222 may be deformed during the assembly process of the display device. That is, the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222 may be deformed at different positions of the display device. The gaps between the films 222 are different.
  • the gap between the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222 can be maintained to a predetermined value. Within the range, the light source 212 and the diffusion film 222 are prevented from contacting each other at a certain position.
  • the backplate 300 is disposed on a side of the backlight module 200 away from the display panel 100 , that is, the backplate 300 is disposed on the rear side of the backlight plate 210 to support the backlight module 200 and the display panel 100 .
  • the material of the back plate 300 can be aluminum alloy, steel, etc. to provide effective support.
  • the display device 10 also includes a back shell 500 located on the side of the back plate 300 away from the display panel 100 . That is, the back shell 500 is disposed on the back side of the back plate 300 .
  • the controller, electrical connection cables, etc. of the display device 10 can be disposed on the back. between the board 300 and the rear case 500 to simplify the appearance of the display device 10 .
  • the material of the back shell 500 can be plastic, metal, etc.
  • the actuator 400 is disposed on a side of the backlight plate 210 away from the display panel 100 , and is used to drive the backlight.
  • the plate 210 vibrates.
  • the actuator 400 is any one or more of an electromagnetic actuator, a magnetostrictive actuator and a piezoelectric actuator, and has high applicability.
  • the exciter 400 may also include a magnetic field generating unit (such as a magnet) and a vibration coil.
  • the magnetic field generating unit is used to generate a magnetic field by inputting a changing current in the vibration coil, so that the vibration coil generates a magnetic field in the magnetic field generating unit.
  • the force in the magnetic field is constantly changing, resulting in vibration.
  • the actuator 400 includes an actuator body 410 and an actuator 420, and the actuator 420 is connected to the backlight panel body 211.
  • the actuator 420 vibrates and is used to drive the backlight panel.
  • the exciter body 410 can vibrate with the backlight plate 210 and transmit the vibration of the backlight plate body 211 to the display panel 100 through the gas layer M, so as to drive the display panel 100 to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the actuator 420 also has different structures. This embodiment does not limit the type of the actuator body 410.
  • the sealed gas layer M can be equivalent to a damping spring.
  • the vibration of the backlight plate 210 can be transmitted to the display panel 100 through the gas layer M, and drive the display panel 100 to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the display panel 100 of the liquid crystal display device is driven to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the display device 10 provided in this embodiment can achieve front-side sound emitting, and the sound and image positions approximately coincide with the center position of the picture, achieving the integration of sound and picture, and the user's audio-visual effect is better.
  • the actuator 400 since the actuator 400 is located on the surface of the backlight plate 210 facing away from the display panel 100, the arrangement of the actuator 400 does not affect the display effect of the display device.
  • the optical film component 220 may have different vibration forms according to the fixation method between the optical film component 220 and the liquid crystal screen.
  • the fluorescent film 221 firmware can vibrate synchronously with the liquid crystal screen.
  • the optical film component 220 When the optical film component 220 is pressed against the liquid crystal screen, there may be a gap between the optical film component 220 and the liquid crystal screen, and the optical film component 220 may vibrate asynchronously with the liquid crystal screen.
  • the optical film component 220 may be in a stationary state.
  • the vibration energy of the actuator 400 can be reduced or the gap of the gas layer M can be increased.
  • this embodiment provides a display device, in which the gas layer M is connected to the atmosphere, that is, the gas layer M is in an unsealed state, and the edge of the display panel There is an air guide channel 811 at the connection position with the edge of the backlight plate body. That is, the bonding structure of the diffusion film 222 and the display panel 100 forms an air guide channel 811 that connects the inside and outside of the gas layer M.
  • the air guide channel 811 has an equivalent length Y and an equivalent inner diameter D, and the equivalent length Y is greater than or equal to 3 times the equivalent inner diameter D. In this way, the air guide channel 811 can be equivalent It is a compliant elastic structural member.
  • the elastic structural member Since the elastic structural member has the function of high-frequency filtering and low-frequency transmission, when the exciter 400 drives the backlight plate 210 to vibrate at low frequencies, the low-frequency sound waves can propagate to the outside of the gas layer M through the air guide channel 811. At this time, the gas layer M and There is gas exchange between the atmosphere, which prevents the liquid crystal layer from being subject to greater gas pressure due to larger amplitudes during low-frequency vibrations.
  • the air guide channel 811 is equivalent to a closed channel. There is no gas exchange between the gas layer M and the atmosphere, and sound waves cannot propagate to the outside of the gas layer M through the air guide channel 811. However, Since the vibration amplitude of the backlight plate 210 when vibrating at high frequency is small, the liquid crystal in the liquid crystal layer will not be deformed under pressure.
  • the diffusion film 222 and the display panel 100 are bonded and fixed through double-sided tape as an example.
  • the double-sided tape includes a plurality of adhesive strips 812 , and the adhesive strips 812 are along the side of the display device 10 . extends in the length direction, and a plurality of rubber strips 812 are spaced apart along the length direction of the side of the display device.
  • the plurality of rubber strips 812 are arranged in multiple columns along their vertical direction (for example, two columns in Figure 31), and along the vertical direction of the rubber strips 812, the ends of two adjacent rubber strips 812 staggered settings.
  • the equivalent length Y and equivalent inner diameter D of the air guide channel 811 are shown in Figure 31.
  • the structure of the air guide channel 811 is relatively simple.
  • a breathable filter element 813 is provided.
  • the filter element 813 can be a sponge or a filter mesh made of fibers.
  • the filter element 813 can be fixed by a rubber strip 812 .
  • the gas in the gas layer M may have a better sealing effect, or may be in an incompletely sealed state.
  • the edge of the display panel 100 is sealed with the edge of the backlight plate 210.
  • a sealed gas layer M is formed; in other embodiments, there is no seal between the display panel 100 and the backlight panel 210, allowing the gas layer M to communicate with the outside air through structures such as assembly gaps between components; in In some embodiments, a specific communication channel may also be provided in the side gap between the display panel 100 and the backlight panel 210, so that the gas layer M can communicate with the outside air while having a certain effect on the vibration transmitted by the gas layer M. filter effect.
  • the sealing state of the gas layer M is not limited here.
  • one end of the second elastic support member 900 can be provided with a receiving cavity for receiving the light source 212 to cover the outside of the light source 212 , and the other end is connected to the diffusion film 222 .
  • the material of the second elastic support member 900 can be a silicone material that is easy to guide light, and the hardness of the silicone material is relatively small.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be connected to the backlight plate body 211 through bonding, snapping, etc., or can be connected to the packaging material of the light source 212 through bonding.
  • the interior of the second elastic support member 900 can be filled with air bubbles, silicone, etc. to uniform the light.
  • the cross-sectional size of the second elastic support member 900 may gradually increase from one end of the light source 212 to one end of the diffusion film 222 , that is, the second elastic support member 900 may be approximately inversely tapered.
  • the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 can also be configured to be convex, so that the light emitted by the light source 212 forms total reflection in the second elastic support member 900 .
  • the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 can also be coated with an optical material, for example, the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 is coated with an elastic silicone layer, so that the light emitted by the light source 212 can Total reflection is formed in the second elastic support member 900 or only part of the light is emitted through the side wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 , for example, less than 20% of the light is emitted.
  • the intersection area of the lighting area formed by the adjacent light sources 212 in the diffusion film 222 can be smaller, and the distance between different light sources 212 can be reduced.
  • the backlight influence is reduced, that is, the mutual influence between different light control areas is reduced. For example, in the case of local dimming display, the bright and dark contrast of the display device 10 is better.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be connected to the backlight plate 210 through negative pressure adsorption, bonding, snapping, welding, etc.
  • the two ends of the second elastic support member 900 can be fixed by any two methods of abutting, bonding, snapping, and negative pressure adsorption.
  • both ends of the second elastic support member 900 are bonded and fixed to the backlight plate 210 and the diffusion film 222 respectively (not shown), or one end of the second elastic support member 900 is clamped and fixed to the backlight plate 210 and the other end is connected to the diffusion film. 222 is adhesively fixed (not shown), making the stability higher.
  • one end of the second elastic support member 900 is bonded or snapped to the backlight plate 210 , and the other end is abutted or adsorbed to the diffusion film 222 , making assembly more convenient and easy to disassemble and repair.
  • the structure of the second elastic support member 900 is a transparent light guide part.
  • the light guide part is made of light guide glue.
  • the light guide part has a low absorption amount of light and a low light transmittance.
  • the light guide glue has a relatively high hardness, which can form a good buffer for the optical film assembly 230.
  • the light guide part is configured to conduct the light emitted by the light source 212 to the display panel 100, so that the light guide part can transmit the light to the display panel 100.
  • the first light L1 that enters its interior (shown as the folded line with a hollow arrow in Figure 16) is emitted toward one side of the display panel 100.
  • the second elastic support 900 is provided on the light exit side of the backlight plate 210, the more More first light L1 is transmitted to one side of the display panel 100, and the amount of light loss is lower. That is to say, when a second elastic support member 900 is provided at a certain light source 212 , at least part of the light generated by the light source 212 constitutes the first light L1 and is emitted through the corresponding second elastic support member 900 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be disposed at any position on the backlight panel 210 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 can also be disposed between two adjacent light sources 212 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 is wrapped around the outside of the light source 212, And the light guide part is located between the light source 212 and the display panel 100 . That is, one end of the second elastic support member 900 is covered outside the light source 212, and the other end is connected to the optical film assembly 230, which can not only support the optical film assembly 230, but also protect the light source 212.
  • the cross-sectional size of the second elastic support member 900 may gradually increase from one end of the light source 212 to one end of the diffusion film 222 , that is, the second elastic support member 900 may be approximately inversely tapered.
  • the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 can also be configured to be convex, so that the first light L1 injected into the second elastic support member 900 by the light source 212 forms total reflection in the second elastic support member 900 (As shown in Figure 16).
  • the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 can also be coated with an optical material, for example, the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 is coated with an elastic silicone layer, so that the light emitted by the light source 212 can Total reflection is formed in the second elastic support member 900 or only part of the light is emitted through the side wall surface of the second elastic support member 900 , for example, less than 20% of the light is emitted.
  • the intersection area of the lighting area formed by the adjacent light sources 212 in the diffusion film 222 can be smaller, and the distance between different light sources 212 can be reduced.
  • the backlight influence is reduced, that is, the mutual influence between different light control areas is reduced. For example, in the case of local dimming display, the bright and dark contrast of the display device 10 is better.
  • the second elastic support member 900 is an elastic plastic member, which has lower cost. At this time, the second elastic support member 900 is disposed between adjacent light sources 212 .
  • the plurality of second elastic supports 900 include at least two vibration transmitting member groups, and the second elastic supporting members 900 in each vibration transmitting member group are arranged around the outside of the corresponding exciter 400. That is to say, each exciter A set of vibration transmission parts is provided on the outside of each exciter 400.
  • the vibration transmission part set includes a plurality of second elastic supports 900. In this way, the optical film assembly 230 at the corresponding position of each exciter 400 can be better supported, and The transfer efficiency is higher at each exciter 400 position.
  • each light source is provided with a second elastic support member 900, and the large ends of two adjacent second elastic support members 900 are in contact with each other.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can also be connected to the backlight plate body 211 of the backlight plate 210 and be independent of the light source 212 .
  • part of the second elastic support member 900 may be provided outside the light source 212
  • part of the second elastic support member 900 may be connected to the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the following embodiment will be described by taking the connection between the second elastic support member 900 and the backlight panel body 211 as an example.
  • the second elastic support member 900 when the display device is provided with the second elastic support member 900, in order to improve the vibration transmission efficiency and avoid collision between the second elastic support member 900 and the diffusion film 222 or between the diffusion film 222 and the backlight plate body 211, As shown in Figures a to c in Figure 8, the second elastic support member 900 can be sandwiched between the diffusion film 222 and the backlight plate body 211.
  • the second elastic support member 900 is in a compressed state (please Referring to Figure b) in Figure 8, when the exciter 400 drives the backlight panel 210 to vibrate back and forth, the second elastic support member 900 expands and contracts accordingly, and will not be separated from the diffusion film 222 or the backlight panel body 211 to avoid Vibration transmission failure. That is, when the actuator 400 drives the backlight plate 210 to move toward the side away from the diffusion film 222, the second elastic support member 900 extends. At this time, the second elastic support member 900 can be in a natural state (please refer to Figure a in Figure 8 ) or in a compressed state.
  • the height of the second elastic support member 900 in the natural state is greater than the gap of the gas layer M and smaller than the sum of the amplitude of the actuator 420 and the gap of the gas layer M.
  • the height of the second elastic support member 900 is in the natural state. The height below may be the sum of half the amplitude of the actuator 420 and the gap of the gas layer M.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the second elastic support member 900 may be circular, oval, square or other arbitrary shapes.
  • the shape of the second elastic support member 900 can be determined according to its fixing method, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment and has strong applicability.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be pressed between the backlight plate 210 and the optical film assembly 230 through elastic deformation, that is, between the second elastic support member 900 and the backlight plate 210 and between the second elastic support member 900 and the diffusion unit.
  • the membranes 222 are not relatively fixed, and the fixing method is relatively simple.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can also be fixed. Wherein, at least one end of the second elastic support member 900 can be fixed. When one end of the second elastic support member 900 is fixed, the The second elastic support member 900 is fixed to the diffusion film 222. At this time, the other end of the second elastic support member 900 is in contact with the backlight plate body 211. Alternatively, the second elastic support member 900 can be fixed to the backlight panel body 211 , and at this time, the other end of the second elastic support member 900 and the diffusion film 222 are in contact with each other.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be formed by bonding (as shown in Figure 8), snapping (as shown in Figures 9 and 10), negative pressure adsorption (as shown in Figure 11), etc. fixed.
  • the second elastic support member 900 when the second elastic support member 900 is fixed by bonding, it can be bonded and fixed by double-sided tape, bonding liquid, or the like.
  • one end of the second elastic support member 900 is bonded and fixed to the backlight plate body 211, and the other end is in contact with the diffusion film 222 (as shown in FIG. 8).
  • the second elastic support member 900 can also be fixed by snapping, taking into account the diffusion
  • a clamping hole 2111 can be provided on the backlight plate body 211 (as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10), and the end of the second elastic support member 900 extends into the clamping hole 2111 and Connect with the card connection hole 2111.
  • the shape of the locking hole 2111 can be adapted to the shape of the end of the second elastic support member 900 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 when the cross-sectional shape of the second elastic support member 900 is rectangular, the second elastic support member 900 can be fixed by interference fit with the clamping hole 2111 .
  • the clamping hole 2111 can be a tapered hole or a stepped hole (as shown in FIG. 10 ), and the aperture of the clamping hole 2111 is from a hole away from the diffusion film 222 It gradually decreases from one end to the end close to the diffusion film 222 .
  • the axis of the clamping hole 2111 may be perpendicular to the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the axis of the clamping hole 2111 can also be arranged at an angle (not shown), that is, there is an angle between the axis of the clamping hole 2111 and the vertical line of the backlight plate body 211 .
  • the shape of the locking hole 2111 does not need to be limited.
  • the second elastic support member 900 may be a two-section bending structure, one section of which extends into the inclined clamping hole 2111 and is clamped with the clamping hole 2111, and the other end is along the vertical direction of the display device. Extends toward the diffusion film 222 .
  • a fixing piece 2112 (as shown in FIG. 9) can also be laid on the backlight plate body 211.
  • the fixing piece 2112 can be Metal parts or plastic parts, for example, the fixing piece 2112 is an aluminum piece, and a through hole is opened in the position of the aluminum piece corresponding to the clamping hole 2111.
  • One end of the second elastic support member 900 extends into the clamping hole 2111, and the other end passes through the fixing piece.
  • the through hole on 2112 extends toward the diffusion plate 222.
  • the size of the through hole on the fixing piece 2112 is smaller than the size of the clamping hole 2111.
  • the depth of the depression of the snap-in hole 2111 may be smaller than the thickness of the backlight panel body 211.
  • the clamping hole 2111 can also penetrate the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 can also be fixed by negative pressure adsorption, for example, the second elastic support member 900
  • the two ends are respectively adsorbed and fixed to the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222 (as shown in Figure 11).
  • the end of the second elastic support member 900 is provided with a recessed portion (not shown). This embodiment does not limit the recessed depth of the recessed portion, the inner wall shape of the recessed portion, etc., such as the inner surface of the recessed portion.
  • the wall surface can be spherical.
  • the inner wall surface of the recessed portion is mounted on the backlight plate body 211 or the diffusion film 222 to achieve adsorption and fixation.
  • the end of the second elastic support member 900 will be deformed accordingly.
  • the end size of the second elastic support member 900 is larger (as shown in FIG. 11), that is, when both sides of the second elastic support member 900 When both ends are fixed by negative pressure adsorption, the cross-sectional shape of the second elastic support member 900 may be dumbbell-shaped.
  • the end of the second elastic support member 900 is adsorbed and fixed to the bottom wall of the clamping hole 2111 .
  • the two ends of the second elastic support member 900 can be fixed by any two methods of abutting, bonding, snapping, and negative pressure adsorption.
  • both ends of the second elastic support member 900 are bonded and fixed to the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222 respectively (not shown), or one end of the second elastic support member 900 is snap-fastened to the backlight plate body 211, and the other end is fixed to the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222 respectively.
  • One end is bonded and fixed with the diffusion film 222 (not shown), and the fixing stability is high.
  • one end of the second elastic support member 900 is bonded or clipped to the backlight plate body 211 , and the other end is in contact with the diffusion film 222 . Or adsorbed and fixed, it is more convenient to assemble and easy to disassemble and repair.
  • the multiple second elastic support members 900 can also be connected as a whole through the first connecting member 902 (as shown in the figure) 20), where the first connecting member 902 can also be made of elastic materials such as silicone, rubber, etc., so that the second elastic supporting member 900 and the first connecting member 902 can be integrally formed.
  • the plurality of second elastic support members 900 may be arranged according to a preset arrangement. For example, the plurality of second elastic support members 900 may be arranged at intervals in multiple rows and columns.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be disposed in the gap between any two adjacent backlight panels 210 (as shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 ), so that the two adjacent backlight panels 210 form a buffer between them.
  • the second elastic support members 900 can be disposed at the corners of any four adjacent backlight panels 210 , so that a smaller number of second elastic support members 900 can buffer the backlight panels 210 .
  • this embodiment does not limit the placement positions of the second elastic support member 900 and the first connecting member 902 .
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be provided alone on the backlight panel 210, or the second elastic support member 900 can be provided alone between two adjacent backlight panels 210, or the second elastic support member 900 can be provided at any phase.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can also be in the backlight panel 210 and the gap between the two adjacent backlight panels 210 at the same time. (As shown in FIG. 3 ), in this way, a smaller number of second elastic supports 900 can be used to buffer the backlight plate 210 .
  • the first connecting member 902 when two adjacent second elastic supports 900 are connected through the first connecting member 902, the first connecting member 902 is also disposed at the gap between the two adjacent backlight panels 210 ( As shown in Figure 20).
  • this embodiment does not limit the placement positions of the second elastic support member 900 and the first connecting member 902 . That is, the second elastic support member 900 can be disposed on the backlight panel 210 alone. The second elastic support member 900 can also be connected to the first connecting member 902 as a whole and then disposed on the backlight panel 210. The second elastic support member 900 can be disposed on the backlight panel 210 alone. Disposed between two adjacent backlight panels 210 (as shown in FIG. 21 ), the second elastic support member 900 may also be connected to the first connecting member 902 as a whole and then disposed between the two adjacent backlight panels 210 . In some embodiments, a second elastic support member 900 may also be disposed between the backlight panel 210 and two adjacent backlight panels 210 at the same time (as shown in FIG. 22 ).
  • the plurality of second elastic supports 900 can be arranged in any direction.
  • the plurality of second elastic supports 900 are arranged in a radial pattern with the actuator 400 as the center (as shown in FIG. 23A ), thereby ensuring that the backlight panel is 210 uniform and reliable support in all positions.
  • a plurality of second elastic supports 900 may also be arranged non-uniformly, and the arrangement density of the plurality of second elastic supports 900 is greater closer to the actuator 400 (as shown in FIG. 23A), that is, closer to the actuator 400
  • the hardness of different second elastic supporting members 900 may be the same. Considering that the vibration amplitudes at different positions of the backlight panel 210 are different, in some embodiments, the hardness of the second elastic support member 900 at different positions can also be different, that is, the second elastic support member is closer to the actuator 400 at the position. The greater the hardness of the second elastic support member 900 , the smaller the hardness of the second elastic support member 900 at a position farther away from the actuator 400 . In this way, different positions of the backlight plate 210 can have relatively uniform vibration amplitudes, thereby improving the vibration transmission efficiency.
  • the heights of different second elastic support members 900 may be the same. Considering that the vibration amplitudes at different positions of the backlight panel 210 are different, in some embodiments, the heights of the second elastic support members 900 at different positions may be different, that is, the second elastic support members 900 are closer to the actuator 400 The greater the height, the greater the amount of compression in its natural state. The farther away from the actuator 400, the smaller the height of the second elastic support member 900, and the smaller the amount of compression in its natural state. In this way, different positions of the backlight plate 210 can have relatively uniform vibration amplitudes, thereby improving the vibration transmission efficiency.
  • the diffusion film 220 and the display panel 100 are bonded and fixed through double-sided tape as an example.
  • the double-sided tape includes a plurality of strips, and the strips extend along the length direction of the side of the display device 10, and there are multiple strips.
  • the adhesive strips are arranged at intervals along the length direction of the side of the display device.
  • FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram of a first arrangement of second elastic supports provided on multiple backlight boards of a display device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • multiple second elastic supports 900 are arranged around the exciter 400 , that is, multiple vibration transmission components are arranged around the exciter 400 , and the arrangement shape of the multiple second elastic supports 900 is It can be annular (as shown in Figure 3), square annular (not shown), etc., taking the plurality of second elastic supports 900 being arranged in an annular shape as an example, the outer side of the actuator body 410 can be arranged There are multiple annular structures, and the number of second elastic supporting members 900 and the number of rings arranged in each annular structure can be set as needed.
  • the distribution center of the plurality of second elastic supports 900 arranged in an annular structure may be staggered from the center of the actuator body 410 (not shown).
  • multiple second elastic support members 900 are arranged radially with the actuator body 410 as the center, that is, multiple rows of second elastic support members 900 are arranged circumferentially symmetrically with the actuator body 410 as the center, and the arrangement shape It is relatively simple, with low assembly difficulty and low assembly cost.
  • the supporting forces generated by the second elastic support member 900 are located in different directions, so that various positions of the backlight panel 210 can be supported to achieve a reliable and uniform support effect.
  • a plurality of second elastic supports 900 are arranged radially outside the exciter 400 in the circumferential direction.
  • the arrangement spacing between the plurality of second elastic supports 900 increases as the distance between the second elastic supports 900 and the actuator 400 increases; and/or, each The supporting strength of the second elastic support member 900 for the display panel 100 decreases as the distance between the second elastic support member 900 and the actuator 400 increases.
  • the first method is to adjust the arrangement spacing between the second elastic support members 900 , that is, adjust the arrangement density of the second elastic support members 900 around the actuator 400 to adjust different positions of the backlight plate 210 .
  • Support strength the closer the position is to the actuator 400, the more the number of second elastic support members 900 are arranged in the unit area, that is, the smaller the separation distance between different second elastic support members 900, and the farther away from the actuator 400, the smaller the number of second elastic support members 900 arranged in the unit area, that is, the greater the distance between different second elastic support members 900.
  • the support strength of the vibration transmission component is adjusted according to the different vibration amplitudes of the backlight plate 210, and the second elastic support member 900 is appropriately arranged at different positions, which can simplify the installation process of the second elastic support member 900 and improve production efficiency.
  • the backlight plate 210 can also have a relatively uniform vibration amplitude at different positions, thereby improving the vibration transmission efficiency.
  • FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram of a second arrangement of second elastic supports provided on multiple backlight panels of a display device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second way is to adjust the support strength of different positions of the backlight plate 210 by changing the support strength of each second elastic support member 900 itself. That is, the closer the area to the actuator 400 is, the stronger the support strength of each second elastic support member 900 is. The greater the support strength of the second elastic support member 900 itself, the farther away from the exciter 400 the area, the smaller the support strength of each second elastic support member 900 itself, thereby achieving support according to the vibration amplitude of different areas of the backlight panel 210 Adjustment of intensity.
  • the change of the support strength of the second elastic support member 900 depends on the hardness, height and other parameters of the second elastic support member, so that different positions of the backlight plate 210 have relatively uniform vibration amplitudes and improve the vibration transmission efficiency.
  • different filling patterns represent second elastic support members 900 with different hardnesses. From the inner ring to the outer ring, the filling of the second elastic support member 900 becomes sparser, which represents that the hardness of the second elastic support member 900 becomes increasingly sparse. The smaller.
  • the support strength of the second elastic support member 900 for the display panel increases as the distance between the second elastic support member and the actuator increases.
  • the third way is to adjust the support strength of different positions of the backlight panel 210 by combining the above two ways.
  • Comprehensive consideration of the number of the second elastic support members 900 and their own support strength can further reduce the number of the second elastic support members 900, making the structure of the entire vibration transmission assembly more simplified and reducing the difficulty of the process.
  • each second elastic support member 900 can be made to satisfy at least one of the following conditions:
  • the first is to make the cross-sectional area of the second elastic support member 900 in the direction parallel to the display panel 100 decrease as the distance between the second elastic support member 900 and the actuator 400 increases, that is, by adjusting the second elastic support member
  • the size of 900 in the radial direction changes the support strength of the second elastic support member 900.
  • the closer the position is to the actuator 400 the larger the cross-sectional area of the second elastic support member 900 is.
  • the cross-sectional area of piece 900 gradually decreases.
  • the second is that the stiffness of the second elastic support member 900 decreases as the distance between the second elastic support member 900 and the actuator 400 increases.
  • the stiffness of the second elastic support member 900 is determined by the material of the second elastic support member 900 itself. The closer to the actuator 400, the greater the stiffness of the second elastic support member 900. The farther away from the actuator 400, the greater the stiffness of the second elastic support member 900. The smaller the stiffness, thereby adjusting the support strength of the second elastic support member 900 .
  • the third method is to connect the second elastic support member 900 between the backlight plate 210 and the display panel 100 with an interference, and the interference amount between the second elastic support member 900 and the backlight plate 210 in the direction perpendicular to the backlight plate 210 It decreases as the distance between the second elastic support member 900 and the actuator 400 increases. It can be understood that the greater the interference amount of the second elastic support member 900, the greater the support strength of the second elastic support member 900 to the backlight plate 210. The smaller the interference amount of the second elastic support member 900, the greater the interference amount of the second elastic support member 900. The supporting strength of the two elastic supporting members 900 for the backlight plate 210 is smaller, thereby achieving adjustment of the supporting strength of the backlight plate 210 at different positions.
  • the amount of interference decreases as the distance between the second elastic support member 900 and the actuator 400 increases, that is, the closer the position is to the actuator 400, the greater the support strength of the second elastic support member 900, and the farther away from the actuator 400 the position is. , the smaller the support strength of the second elastic support member 900 is.
  • the above-mentioned interference amount can also be adjusted by the height of the second elastic support member 900 .
  • the height of the second elastic support member 900 along the direction perpendicular to the backlight plate 210 gradually decreases from the side close to the actuator 400 to the side far away from the actuator 400 , that is, the closer it is to the actuator 400 , The greater the height of the second elastic support member 900, the greater the compression amount in the natural state.
  • this arrangement also avoids the non-interference fit of the second elastic support member 900 close to the actuator 400 due to the assembly tolerance of the second elastic support member 900 far away from the actuator 400, so as to ensure that the second elastic support member 900 close to the actuator 400 is not an interference fit.
  • the second elastic support member 900 has reliable support strength.
  • the above various methods can be combined in any way.
  • the second elastic support members 900 at different positions can be set to have different hardnesses.
  • the second elastic support members 900 at different positions can also be set to have different hardnesses and different heights at the same time.
  • the second elastic support member 900 may also be a composite structure.
  • Figures 13 and 14 are side views of the second elastic support member 900.
  • Figure b in Figure 13 is a cross-sectional view of Figure a in Figure 13.
  • Figure 14 Figure b is a cross-sectional view of figure a in Figure 14, in which the second elastic support member 900 includes a support component 910 and an elastic component 920.
  • the support component 910 is a non-elastic component, and its deformation is not sensitive to temperature.
  • the support component 910 The material is metal, plastic, etc., and the elastic component 920 can be made of silicone, rubber, etc. In this way, the second elastic support member 900 is less affected by temperature, its support strength is relatively stable, and its vibration transmission efficiency is relatively high.
  • the elastic component 920 can be provided at both ends of the supporting component 910, and the two elastic parts are connected to the backlight plate body 211 and the diffusion film 222 respectively.
  • the elastic member 920 can also cover part of the outer wall of the support member 910 , the elastic member 920 is connected to the diffusion film 222 , and the portion of the support member 910 exposed outside the elastic member 920 is connected to the backlight panel body. 211 connection.
  • the support component 910 is a metal part
  • metal welding points can be set on the backlight plate body 211, and the patella support component 910 is welded and connected, which has better fixation stability and a more mature welding process.
  • the second elastic support component 900 and The assembly efficiency between the backlight panel bodies 211 is relatively high.
  • different exciters 400 can belong to different channels, and the exciters 400 of different channels can vibrate independently. Then, in order to reduce the vibration influence between different exciters 400, two adjacent exciters can be isolated by the whole body composed of the second elastic support member 900 and the first connecting member 902.
  • the entirety formed by the second elastic support member 900 and the first connecting member 902 may be called an isolation bar 903 , and the isolation bar 903 is disposed between two adjacent exciters 400 .
  • the number of isolation bars 903 between two adjacent exciters 400 may be one or more (as shown in Figures 28 and 29).
  • the second elastic supports 900 on the two adjacent isolation bars 903 may be arranged oppositely or staggered. , to gradually reduce vibration transmission.
  • This embodiment does not limit the number of channels, such as the two left and right channels in Figure 28 or the three left, middle and right channels in Figure 29. Any two adjacent exciters 400 can be separated by isolation. Article 903 for isolation.
  • a second elastic support member 900 can also be provided at the circumferential position of any one of the actuators 400.
  • the optical film assembly 220 can be An anti-wear component 904 is provided in the membrane assembly 220 .
  • the anti-wear component 904 can be disposed between the diffusion film 222 and the fluorescent film 221 so that the diffusion film 222 and the fluorescent film 221 are spaced apart.
  • the wear-resistant component 904 may be polyethylene glycol terephthalate (PET).
  • PET is provided with a coating that can refract light to refract, reflect, etc. , that is, by designing the shape, structure, etc. of the anti-wear part 904, the light intensity at the location of the anti-wear part 904 is controlled.
  • the uniform light control function of the display device 10 can be achieved.
  • the anti-wear component 904 is disposed between two adjacent light sources 212 to avoid low brightness in the area between the two adjacent light sources 212 .
  • the display device 10 may also have a preset brightness within a preset viewing angle range. For example, the brightness within a range of 35 degrees from the front view of the display device 10 is higher, while the brightness within a range other than 45 degrees is smaller.
  • it can also function as an optical barrier, that is, the intersection area of the lighting area formed by adjacent anti-wear parts 904 on the front side of the diffusion film 222 is smaller, thereby reducing the backlight influence between different anti-wear parts 904 and also This is to reduce the mutual influence between different light control areas.
  • the display device 10 has a better light-dark contrast ratio.
  • the contact positions of the anti-wear component 904 with the diffusion film 222 and the fluorescent film 221 do not have sharp angular structures, for example, the contact positions of the anti-wear component 904 with the diffusion film 222 and the fluorescent film 221
  • the contact surface is flat or arc surface.
  • the curved surface protrudes toward one side of the fluorescent film 221 .
  • the anti-wear component 904 can approximately form a convex lens structure, which is used to converge the light emitted by the light source 212 and has the effect of viewing angle, thereby solving the problem of expanded viewing angle and reduced brightness after the fluorescent film 221 and the diffusion film 222 are attached.
  • wear protection 904 may be a multi-layer structure.
  • the anti-wear component 904 includes a plurality of first light treatment layers stacked in sequence, and the refractive index of each first light treatment layer is unequal.
  • the first light processing layer may be three layers: a first layer 9041, a second layer 9042, and a third layer 9043.
  • the first layer 9041, the second layer 9042 and the third layer 9043 can be bonded and fixed by OCA (Optically Clear Adhesive) optical glue.
  • OCA Optically Clear Adhesive
  • the thickness of any one of the first layer 9041, the second layer 9042 and the third layer 9043 It can be 1 micron to 3 microns.
  • the first layer 9041 and the second layer 9042 can be in the shape of sheets.
  • the third layer 9043 has a curved light-emitting surface.
  • the refractive index of the first layer 9041, the second layer 9042 and the third layer 9043 are different.
  • the refractive index of the first layer 9041 can be 1.5
  • the refractive index of the second layer 9042 can be 2.2, so that part of the light is emitted through the arc-shaped light exit surface of the anti-wear component 904, and part of the light is refracted multiple times by the anti-wear component 904. After reflection, it shoots out at a preset angle.
  • the wear-resistant component 904 can also include a second light processing layer and an optical component 9045.
  • the second light processing layer can include two layers of OCA optical glue layers 9044, and two layers of OCA optical components.
  • the adhesive layer 9044 is mounted and fixed on the fluorescent film 221 and the diffusion film 222 respectively.
  • the two optical adhesive layers are spaced apart by an optical component 9045 for detecting the second light L2 incident on the anti-wear component 904 (as shown in Figure 18 and 19 ) is reflected toward the side of the fluorescent film 221
  • the optical component 9045 is made of polymethyl methacrylate (polymethyl methacrylate). methacrylate, PMMA), polycarbonate (Polycarbonate, PC), etc.
  • the light emitted by the light source 212 enters the gap between the two OCA optical adhesive layers 9044 through one of the OCA optical adhesive layers 9044, and is emitted through the other OCA optical adhesive layer 9044.
  • the optical component 9045 can reflect the second light L2 in the two OCA optical glue layers 9044, so that the second light L2 is reflected toward the gap between the two OCA optical glue layers 9044, and passes through another OCA optical glue layer.
  • the glue layer 9044 is ejected.
  • At least part of the light generated by a certain light source 212 constitutes the second light L2 and will be emitted through the corresponding anti-wear component 904 to reduce the impact on other lighting areas, that is, to achieve the above-mentioned "optical barrier” function.
  • a filter 9046 can also be disposed in the gap between the two OCA optical adhesive layers 9044, and its material can be PET, which is used to filter the large-angle light emitted by the light source 212 toward the side of the diffusion film 222. It is reflected, processed by the optical film component 220 and then emitted toward the direction again, so that the angle of the light emitted at the position where the OCA optical adhesive layer 9044 is located is relatively concentrated.
  • each actuator 400 may be provided with a wear protection piece 904 corresponding to it.
  • each light source 212 may also be provided with an anti-wear component 904 to make the spacing at different positions between the diffusion film 222 and the fluorescent film 221 more uniform and avoid contact wear.
  • the effect of the low-frequency sound of the display device 10 is directly related to the amount of air that the actuator 400 can push. Since the exciter 400 can drive the entire display area of the display panel 100 to vibrate and produce sound, the vibrating portion of the display panel 100 has a larger area and can push a larger volume of air, and the display device 10 can emit better low-frequency sounds.
  • a and b are the length and width of the flat plate
  • ⁇ is the density of the flat plate
  • h is the thickness of the flat plate
  • D is the bending strength of the flat plate.
  • the display panel 100 and the backlight module 200 are a flat plate structure as a whole, and its weight is relatively large, which is equivalent to the equivalent density ⁇ of the flat plate structure being larger. According to formula (1), it can be seen that as ⁇ increases, first The reduction of the first-order mode frequency f11 helps the exciter 400 to excite low-frequency sounds with better sound effects.
  • the actuating member 420 can also be connected to the rear case 500 , for example, the actuating member 420 is bonded, screwed or snapped to the rear case 500 . In this way, during the vibration process of the actuating member 420, the rear case 500 can be synchronously driven to vibrate and produce sound, thereby increasing the intensity of the sound of the display device 10.
  • a mounting component 421 can be provided on the actuating member 420, and the mounting component 421 is mounted on the rear housing 500, for example, by bonding.
  • the mounting component 421 has a small weight and high strength, and its material can be metal, plastic, etc.
  • a vibration stabilizing member 40 a may be provided on the exciter 400 , and the vibration stabilizing member 40 a connects the exciter body 410 and the actuating member 420 .
  • the vibration stabilizing member 40a has elasticity, and may be a spring, a rubber member, etc.
  • the elastic deformation ability of the vibration stabilizer 40a can also be achieved by bending, thinning, etc.
  • the vibration stabilizer 40a has an annular sheet structure, and the annular sheet structure is surrounding the outside of the actuating member 420. By bending the annular sheet structure at least once, the cross-sectional shape of the annular sheet structure can be wavy or zigzag.
  • the elastic force of the vibration stabilizer 40a can be different at different positions in the circumferential direction of the actuator 420.
  • the elastic force of the vibration stabilizer 40a is larger.
  • the vibration amplitude of the left side of the actuating member 420 is limited, so that the forces at different circumferential positions of the actuating member 420 are relatively balanced, and the actuating member 420 can reciprocate along the vertical direction of the display device 10 .
  • the air layer is equivalent to a damping spring, which has a certain filtering effect on high-frequency sounds. That is to say, the sounds emitted by the display panel 100 have high-frequency losses.
  • an elastic filter 40b can also be provided between the actuator 420 and the rear shell 500.
  • the elastic filter 40b has elasticity. Since the amplitude of high-frequency sounds is small, the elasticity The filter member 40b can consume high-frequency vibrations.
  • the low-frequency vibration of the actuator 420 can be transmitted to the back shell 500, and drive the back shell 500 to vibrate to emit low-frequency sound. At the same time, the actuation can be avoided.
  • the high-frequency vibration of the component 420 is transmitted to the back case 500, and it can also prevent the high-frequency vibration of the back case 500 from being transmitted back to the back plate, causing the back plate to resonate and causing abnormal vibration of the electrical devices on the back plate.
  • the elastic filter member 40b may be a spring or rubber member.
  • the elastic deformation ability of the elastic filter member 40b can also be achieved by bending, thinning, etc.
  • the elastic filter member 40b has an annular sheet structure. The annular sheet structure is surrounded on the outside of the actuator 420. By bending the annular sheet structure at least once, the cross-sectional shape of the annular sheet structure can be wavy or sawtooth. shape.
  • the actuating member 420 and the back case 500 are spaced apart in the vertical direction of the display device 10 , and the actuating member 420 and the back case 500 are connected through the elastic filter member 40b.
  • the back case 500 may have a mounting hole 530.
  • the mounting component 421 is disposed in the mounting hole 530, and elastic filtering is used between the mounting component 421 and the back shell 500.
  • the components 40b are connected together.
  • the elastic filter component 40b drives the rear case 500 to vibrate and produce sound. In this way, the high-frequency vibration of the actuating component 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the rear housing 500.
  • the elastic filter member 40b can also play a role in stabilizing the actuating member 420 to avoid distortion during the reciprocating movement of the actuating member 420.
  • the mounting firmware can also be fixed on the back shell 500 through double-sided tape.
  • the mounting hole 530 is a step hole.
  • the mounting firmware is fixed on the step surface of the step hole. It can be understood that at this time, the vibration of the actuator 420 in the full frequency range can be transmitted to the rear shell 500 .
  • the back case 500 when the actuator 420 and the back case 500 are not connected to each other, when the actuator 400 drives the display panel 100 to vibrate and make sounds, the back case 500 will also make sounds and vibrate at the same time, because the display panel 100 and the back case 500 have the same area. , the display panel 100 and the back case 500 have the same resonance frequency, so the back case 500 will also generate noise that can be heard by the user.
  • the rear shell exciter 540 can be provided at the maximum vibration position (for example, the resonance position) of the rear shell 500 , and the rear shell exciter 540 drives the vibration when the maximum vibration position vibrates.
  • the direction is opposite to the vibration direction of the maximum vibration position driven by the exciter 400, so as to reduce the vibration amount of the rear case 500 and prevent the rear case 500 from generating noise.
  • the maximum vibration position can be obtained through test simulation, and the number of maximum vibration positions can be multiple (as shown in Figure a and Figure 44 b).
  • the rear housing exciter 540 may be controlled to vibrate via a control signal.
  • the principle is as follows:
  • a control signal is applied to the rear shell exciter 540 at a certain frequency point, and the rear shell 500 has a first vibration frequency characteristic
  • the rear shell 500 has the second vibration frequency characteristic, and obtain the vibration frequency domain transfer function between the second vibration frequency characteristic and the first vibration frequency characteristic through processor processing;
  • the vibration frequency domain transfer functions at each frequency point are summed through the first adder to obtain the entire frequency response range.
  • the vibration transfer function is reversely processed by an inverter and applied to the rear shell exciter 540 to drive the rear shell exciter 540 to vibrate.
  • the rear shell 500' in the related art is provided with a first reinforcing rib 550' (as shown in Figure 46a), and the first reinforcing rib
  • the ribs 550' are usually in a regular geometric shape with a relatively simple structure.
  • the shape of the first reinforcing ribs 550' is a grid, circle, strip, etc. with the same size.
  • the regular geometric shape of the first reinforcing rib 550' easily causes the rear case 500 to generate a resonant frequency with a fixed loudness.
  • the rear shell 500 is provided with a second reinforcing rib 560 of an irregular geometric shape (as shown in b in Figure 46 ).
  • the reinforcing ribs 560 may have irregular shapes, irregular grid sizes, irregular extension directions, irregular protruding heights, irregular widths, etc.
  • the shape of the second reinforcing ribs 560 can be a honeycomb grid, a trapezoidal grid, or a rectangular grid. Each grid in the trapezoidal grid second reinforcing ribs 560 or the rectangular grid second reinforcing ribs 560 can be of different sizes or shapes. The shapes are different.
  • the irregular extension direction may refer to the angle between the extension direction of the strip-shaped second reinforcement 560 (shown as the dotted line in Figure b in Figure 46) and the transverse or longitudinal direction of the display device, or the second reinforcement
  • the ribs 560 are bent, such as wavy.
  • Irregular protrusion height refers to that along the extension direction of the second reinforcing rib 560 , the protrusion height at different positions of the second reinforcing rib 560 is different.
  • the vibration mode of the original rear shell can be destroyed and the vibration mode of the rear shell 500 can be enriched, that is, the resonance frequencies of the rear shell 500 are relatively dispersed, so as to reduce the resonance of the rear shell 500
  • the amplitude of vibration at the time is thus achieved to prevent the rear case 500 from generating noise.
  • the area of the back case 500 is equivalent to the area of the display panel 100. Therefore, low-frequency resonance is likely to occur between the back case 500 and the display panel 100, causing the back case 500 to generate noise.
  • the rear case 500 can be arranged in sections, as shown in Figures a to c in Figure 47 , that is, the rear case includes a plurality of interconnected sub-rear cases 501 , and the plurality of sub-rear cases 501 are arranged side by side.
  • the back case 500 is divided into two, three or more sections, and adjacent sub-back cases 501 can be bonded and fixed by foam (as shown in Figure 47 b), double-sided tape, or the like.
  • the area of the sub-rear case 501 is smaller and smaller than the area of the display panel 100 , so the probability of resonance with the display panel 100 is low, thus preventing the back case 500 from causing low-frequency resonance.
  • multiple sub-rear cases 501 may be arranged in a horizontal direction or in a vertical direction.
  • each sub-rear case 501 may be the same (as shown in FIG. 47 ). In some embodiments, the area of each sub-rear case 501 may be unequal.
  • noise may be generated at the contact location between the edge of the rear case 500 and the back panel 300 .
  • a first elastic buffer such as foam is provided between the edge of the back case 500 and the back plate 300 570 (as shown in Figure 48 a), to avoid rigid contact between the back case 500 and the back plate, or to space the edge of the back case 500 and the back plate 300 to avoid a gap between the back case 500 and the back plate. Contact occurs, and a gap is formed between the edge of the rear case 500 and the back plate 300 .
  • the display device 10 is also provided with a blocking member 580 .
  • the blocking member 580 is used to block the foam or the above-mentioned gap to beautify the appearance of the display device 10 and prevent foreign matter from entering the backplane through the gap. Between 300 and 500 for the rear case.
  • the shielding member 580 is arranged around the outer circumferential direction of the display device 10 and can be fixed by adhesive.
  • elastic damping members 590 are set on the outer sides of the locking screws of the back plate 300 and the back case 500, such as damping elements.
  • Bushing shown in Figure 48, Figure b
  • foam shown in Figure 48, Figure c
  • spring shown in Figure 48, Figure d
  • the rear shell exciter 540 is provided on the rear shell 500
  • the second reinforcing rib 560 with an irregular geometric shape is provided on the rear shell 500
  • the rear shell 500 is arranged in segments, and the edges and edges of the rear shell 500 are reduced. Any of the friction between the back plates 300 can be used to prevent the rear case 500 from generating noise.
  • at least two of the above methods can also be used, for example, when the rear shell 500 is arranged in sections, irregular reinforcement ribs are provided on the rear shell 500 at the same time.
  • the exciter 400 includes a vibrating plate 430, which is connected to the actuating member 420.
  • the vibrating plate 430 is configured The air is driven by the actuating member 420 to vibrate and produce sound. That is, during the vibration process of the actuating member 420, the vibrating piece 430 can be synchronously driven to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the vibrating piece 430 can be the back plate 300 or the back case 500 , that is, the actuator 420 drives the back plate 300 or the back case 500 to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the vibrating plate 430 can also be an independent component.
  • the size of the vibrating plate 430 may be equivalent to the size of the U iron 442 of the electromagnetic exciter.
  • the vibrating piece 430 may be a metal sheet or a plastic sheet, and the thickness of the vibrating piece 430 may be 0.3 mm to 3 mm. In this way, the vibrating piece 430 has a smaller weight and a higher hardness, and can excite better high-frequency sounds.
  • the display device 10 provided by the embodiment of the present application can simultaneously drive the display panel 100 and the vibrating piece 430 to emit sound through the actuator 420, and has a good sound effect.
  • the display device 10 By simultaneously driving the vibrating piece 430 and the display panel 100 to vibrate and produce sound, the display device 10 provided in the embodiment of the present application can emit a low-frequency sound of 50-70 Hz, and can emit a high-frequency sound of about 2000 Hz.
  • the display device 10 has a wide frequency response. .
  • the back plate 300 and the back shell 500 form a sound cavity Q
  • the vibrating piece 430 is located in the sound cavity Q to oppose the vibrating piece 430. form protection.
  • the vibrating piece 430 pushes the air in the sound cavity Q to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the sound waves emitted by the vibration can be transmitted to the sound cavity Q through the sound outlet P. outside, and superimposed with the sound waves emitted by the display panel 100 to compensate for the high-frequency part.
  • Tweeters 1000 can also be provided in the circumference of the display device 10 to emit high-frequency sounds, for example, on the sky and ground sides of the display device. , at least one high-frequency speaker 1000 is provided on the left and right sides respectively (as shown in Figure 63).
  • the tweeter 1000 shell emits sound toward the outside of the display device 10 in the circumferential direction.
  • the sky-side tweeter 1000 emits sound toward the upper side of the display device 10
  • the ground-side tweeter 1000 emits sound toward the lower side.
  • multiple tweeters 1000 are arranged symmetrically.
  • the tweeter 1000 refers to a speaker that can emit high-frequency sounds. It can be a speaker that only emits high-frequency sounds, or it can be a full-band speaker that emits high-frequency sounds by inputting a high-frequency control signal to the controller. As shown in FIG. 64 , a full-band control signal can be input to the exciter 400 , and a high-frequency control signal can be input to the tweeter 1000 through the high-pass filter 2000 .
  • the tweeter 1000 emits the high-frequency sound toward the outside of the circumferential direction of the display device 10 , which will cause the sound image of the display device 10 to be blurred, making it impossible to focus on positioning.
  • a phase plug 3000 can be provided on the tweeter 1000.
  • the phase plug 3000 is provided with a guide arc surface 4000.
  • the shape of the guide arc surface 4000 can be used to reflect at least part of the high-frequency sound waves emitted by the tweeter 1000 toward the front side of the display device 10 through the guide arc surface 4000, so that the tweeter 1000 can emit sound toward the front side of the display device 10. .
  • the propagation direction of the reflected high-frequency sound waves may have an angle with the vertical direction of the display device, or the propagation direction of the reflected high-frequency sound waves may be parallel to the vertical direction of the display device. This embodiment is not limited. .
  • P1 is the propagation direction of the low-frequency sound wave emitted by the exciter 400
  • P2 and P3 are the propagation areas of the high-frequency sound wave emitted by the tweeter 1000.
  • the frequency of P3 is higher than the frequency of P2, and the high-frequency sound waves of P2 and P3 propagate toward the front side of the display device 10 after being reflected by the wall. In this way, sound waves of different frequencies P1, P2, and P3 have different delays, and sound waves of different frequencies have different center positions of the sound image.
  • the display device 10 can also perform sound image localization through control signals of the exciter 400 and the tweeter 1000 . Specifically, as shown in Figure 68:
  • the full-band sound wave of the display device 10 is divided into N frequency bands through a filter.
  • the filter can be called a frequency band filter 8000.
  • Different delay times are given to each frequency band through the second delayer 5000, so that the time for sound waves in different frequency bands to reach the human ear can be adjusted.
  • a certain position on the screen is used as the center position of the virtual sound and image, starting from this position point, the paths of sound waves of different frequencies reaching the human ear can be calculated, and the delay of each frequency band can be calculated.
  • the sound waves of each frequency band are added through the second adder 6000 and then input into the high-frequency speaker 1000 as a control signal.
  • the human ear listens The sound you hear is emitted from the virtual sound and image position.
  • the stand 9000 may be hollow inside for setting the tweeter 1000 to emit high-frequency sound.
  • the support 9000 can be provided with a sound outlet for sound wave propagation.
  • an exciter can also be provided on the inner wall of the support 9000 to drive the support 9000 to vibrate and produce sound, that is, the display device 10 can emit sound forward.
  • a name identification piece is provided on the front side of the display device 10.
  • the name identification piece can be made of metal.
  • a sound driver 7020 that drives the name identification piece to vibrate and sound can be provided on the display device 10.
  • the sound driver 7020 can Electromagnetic actuators, magnetostrictive actuators, etc. are well known to those skilled in the art.
  • a second connector 7010 can be provided between the name identification component (not shown) and the sound driver 7020.
  • the connection is approximately U-shaped, including two connectors located on the front and rear sides of the display panel.
  • the vibration segment and the connection segment located on the lower side of the display panel, where the resonance frequencies of the two vibration segments are the same, and the resonance frequency is different from the resonance frequency of the connection segment.
  • the sound driver 7020 can drive one of the vibration segments to vibrate, and The other vibrating section is driven to resonate, and the connecting section is used to transmit the vibration between the two vibrating sections without resonating with the vibrating section. This can reduce the sound waves emitted by the display device 10 toward the lower side.
  • the width of the connecting section may be smaller than the width of the vibrating section, for example, the connecting section may be dumbbell-shaped.
  • reinforcing ribs, metal attachments, etc. can also be provided on the connecting sections.
  • the connecting section and the vibrating section are made of different materials.
  • the electromagnetic exciter 400 includes a voice coil and a magnetic component 440 .
  • the magnetic component 440 is used to generate a magnetic field, and the voice coil vibrates along the axis direction of the voice coil in the magnetic field.
  • the magnetic component 440 includes a U iron 442 and a washer 443 that are well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the U iron 442 is in the shape of a cylinder with an opening.
  • the magnet is arranged on the bottom surface of the U iron 442.
  • the washer 443 is arranged on the magnet.
  • the magnetic assembly 440 is used to provide a stable magnetic field in the magnetic air gap.
  • one end of the voice coil is connected to the backlight plate 210, and a connecting piece can be provided between the voice coil and the backlight plate 210 to increase the connection area between the voice coil and the backlight plate 210 and prevent the voice coil and the backlight plate 210 from being separated from each other.
  • the other end of the voice coil is inserted into the magnetic air gap, and the voice coil is fixed on the exciter body 410 through elastic waves. As the magnetic field changes, the voice coil is forced to move back and forth along its own axis.
  • the voice coil forms the actuator 420 and is connected to the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the exciter 400 also includes a connecting rod 450.
  • the connecting rod 450 extends along the thickness direction of the display device 10.
  • the connecting rod 450 can be an aluminum rod, a plastic rod, etc., and has a small weight.
  • the magnetic component 440 is provided with a through hole 441 for the connecting rod 450 to pass through. Specifically, the through hole 441 is provided on the magnet, the U iron 442 and the washer 443. In this way, the voice coil and the vibrating piece 430 are connected to the connecting rod 450 respectively.
  • the two ends, that is, the actuator 420 and the vibrating piece 430 are respectively connected to the two ends of the connecting rod 450 to prevent the vibrating piece 430 and the backlight plate 210 from interfering with each other during vibration.
  • the connecting rod 450 extends along the thickness direction of the display device 10 , which means that the two ends of the connecting rod 450 connected to the actuator and the vibrating piece 430 are respectively located on both sides of the actuator body along the thickness direction of the display device 10 , without limiting the extension direction of the rod body of the connecting rod 450.
  • the connecting rod 450 passes through the U iron 442 and the washer 443, the connecting rod 450 can be a straight rod.
  • the connecting rod 450 bypasses the outer wall of the exciter body, the connecting rod 450 can be a bent rod.
  • the shape of the connecting rod 450 is not limited.
  • the actuator 400 is a magnetostrictive actuator.
  • the magnetostrictive actuator uses the magnetostrictive effect to drive the backlight plate 210 to vibrate.
  • the magnetostrictive effect refers to that after the magnetostrictive material is magnetized in a magnetic field, it will elongate or shorten along the magnetization direction. This embodiment does not take into account the structure, material, etc. of each component in the magnetostrictive actuator. Make restrictions.
  • the exciter body includes a coil 401 and a telescopic member 402.
  • the telescopic member 402 can undergo telescopic deformation along the axial direction of the coil 401;
  • the actuator 420 includes a connected first movement
  • the first moving part 403 is connected to the exciter body, and the first moving part 403 is located at the end of the coil 401 along its own axial direction;
  • the second moving part 404 is connected to the exciter body, and is The backlight panels 210 are connected, and the second moving part 404 is located on the side of the coil 401 along its own radial direction.
  • first moving part 403 and the second moving part 404 are connected and form a similar L-shaped bending structure, and the first moving part 403 can form one of the folding edges of the bending structure and be disposed at the end of the coil 401.
  • the two moving parts 404 are located on the other folded edge and are arranged on the radial side of the coil 401 .
  • the magnetostrictive actuator also includes a magnetic component 405.
  • the coil 401 is used to generate an alternating magnetic field according to the control signal.
  • the telescopic component 402 can expand and contract along the axial direction of the coil 401 in the superposed magnetic field of the alternating magnetic field and the magnetic field generated by the magnetic component 405. Deformation.
  • the first moving part 403 can be driven by the telescopic member 402 to move back and forth relative to the end of the coil 401, and the second moving part 404 can be moved back and forth under the elastic force of the first moving part 403, and driven by the elastic force of the first moving part 403.
  • the body vibrates, wherein the reciprocating movement direction of the second moving part 404 is arranged at an angle with the axial direction of the coil 401 .
  • the first moving part 403 When the telescopic member 402 extends, the first moving part 403 can move toward the side away from the coil 401 under the resistance of the telescopic member 402; when the telescopic member 402 contracts, the first moving part 403 can move closer under the action of its own elastic force.
  • One side of the coil 401 moves so that when the telescopic member 402 expands and contracts in the superimposed magnetic field, the first moving part 403 can move back and forth relative to the coil 401.
  • the second moving part 404 can reciprocate under the action of the first moving part 403 or its own elastic force to drive the backlight panel 210 to vibrate.
  • the reciprocating direction of the second moving part 404 is set at an angle with the axial direction of the coil 401, that is, the reciprocating direction of the backlight plate 210 is at an angle with the axis of the coil 401.
  • the size of the actuator 400 along the reciprocating direction of the backlight plate 210 is approximately the radial size of the actuator 400 along the coil 401 , and the radial size of the actuator 400 along the coil 401 is much smaller than the size of the actuator 400 along the coil 401 .
  • 401 axial size in this way, the size of the display device 10 along the reciprocating direction of the backlight plate 210 is smaller, which is in line with the development trend of ultra-thin display device 10 .
  • the connecting rod 450 can pass through the actuator body, or can go around the outer wall of the actuator body and extend to the other side of the actuator body. This embodiment is not suitable for The structure of the connecting rod 450 is limited.
  • the first moving part 403 can achieve a reciprocating swing in which the connection end with the actuator body is supported, and has a fixed end and a moving end connected to the second moving part 404 .
  • the first distance there is a first distance along the extension direction of the first moving part 403 between the fixed end of the first moving part 403 and the telescopic part 402, and there is a first distance between the moving end of the first moving part 403 and the telescopic part 402 along the first direction.
  • the second spacing in the extension direction of the moving part 403, the first spacing is smaller than the second spacing, so as to effectively increase the reciprocating offset of the moving end of the first moving part 403 and increase the vibration amplitude of the backlight plate 210.
  • the sound emitted by the backlight plate 210 can have Larger sound pressure levels and lower low-frequency frequencies.
  • the reciprocating movement direction of the second moving part 404 and the telescopic direction of the telescopic member 402 are perpendicular to each other.
  • first moving part 403 and the second moving part 404 are connected through an inclined connecting part 406.
  • first connecting part 406 extends along the radial direction of the coil 401, so that the first moving part 403 can The smaller moving distance of the end connected to the connecting portion 406 causes the second moving portion 404 to have a larger vibration amplitude.
  • the display device 10 also includes a reinforcing plate 600 .
  • the thickness of the board 600 can be 1mm-4mm, for example, the thickness is 2mm.
  • the reinforcement board 600 is mounted on the side of the backlight plate body 211 away from the display panel 100.
  • the reinforcement board 600 is connected to the backlight through an adhesive member such as double-sided tape.
  • the plate 210 is bonded and fixed, and the actuator 400 is connected to the reinforcing plate 600 .
  • the plurality of backlight panels 210 and the reinforcing plate 600 are connected as a whole, and there are tight joints between two adjacent backlight panels 210 .
  • the backlight panel 210 can also dissipate heat through the reinforcing plate 600 .
  • the reinforcing plate 600 may be connected to the back panel 300 to strengthen the reinforcing plate 600 and the backlight panel 210 To position.
  • the back plate 300 is provided with protruding positioning posts 330 (as shown in FIG. 81 ), and the lamp panel and the reinforcing plate 600 are respectively provided with positioning holes for the positioning posts 330 to pass through.
  • the positioning posts 330 may be integrally formed with the back plate 300 .
  • the positioning posts 330 may be positioning rivets connected to the back plate 300 or the like.
  • the actuator 400 is disposed on the side of the reinforcing plate 600 away from the backlight panel body 211.
  • the vibration force of the actuator 400 passes through the reinforcing plate 600, the backlight panel body 211, and the gas in sequence.
  • the layer M is transferred to the display panel 100 to cause the display panel 100 to vibrate and generate sound.
  • the reinforcing plate 600 can be a honeycomb panel or a carbon fiber plate.
  • the core material of the reinforcing plate 600 includes but is not limited to paper, aramid, metal or other rigid foam materials.
  • the skin material of the reinforcing plate 600 includes but is not limited to Materials such as fiberglass, carbon fiber, glass-carbon hybrids, plastic or lightweight aluminum.
  • the reinforcing plate 600 can also serve as a heat conduction and heat dissipation plate for the backlight plate 210 .
  • the gas pressure change sensitivity of the gas layer M formed between the backlight plate 210 and the display panel 100 is related to the gap size of the gas layer M. That is, the larger the gap of the gas layer M, the smaller the gas layer M. The lower the sensitivity of M to changes in air pressure; the smaller the gap of the gas layer M, the stronger the sensitivity of the gas layer M to changes in air pressure; and the larger the gap of the gas layer M, the lower the transmission efficiency of vibration transmission, the display panel 100 The vocal effect is worse.
  • the light source in the display device of the sound-generating display panel 100 can use a Mini-LED light source. Due to the small size of the Mini-LED light source, the gas layer M between the display panel 100 and the backlight plate 210 can be effectively reduced. gap, and utilizes the vibration force of the exciter to vibrate the backlight panel 210, and transmits it to the display panel 100 through an equivalent damping spring (ie, the gas layer M) to generate sound.
  • an equivalent damping spring ie, the gas layer M
  • the light sources in the display device of the sound-generating display panel 100 include but are not limited to Mini-LED light sources.
  • Other backlight sources can also be used.
  • direct-type backlights or edge-type backlights can also be used.
  • the backlight or edge-type backlight has a large number of light sources. For example, about 100 light sources (such as lamp beads) are used. Therefore, a larger light mixing distance is required.
  • the gap size of the gas layer M can be 10mm.
  • the display device further includes a sound-generating component, the sound-generating component includes at least one exciter, and the exciter is disposed on a side of the backlight panel facing away from the display panel.
  • Figure 24A is a schematic diagram of the splicing structure of multiple backlight panels of the display device provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 24B is a cross-sectional view of the display device in Figure 24A; as shown in Figures 24A to 24B, the backlight panels 210 are spliced to each other and located in the optical film assembly On a side facing away from the display panel 100 , the backlight panel 210 is configured to provide a backlight source 212 to the display panel 100 .
  • This application preferably uses mini-LED backlight panels.
  • the size of the display device 10 is usually larger than the size of the backlight panel 210, that is, the number of backlight panels 210 is usually Multiple, multiple backlight panels 210 are arranged in arrays and spliced together, that is, the display panel 100 is composed of multiple mini-LED backlight panels 210 spliced together.
  • Each mini-LED backlight panel 210 is provided with multiple light sources 212 on the side facing the display panel 100, and the multiple light sources 212 are arranged at intervals.
  • the second elastic support member 900 is located in the gap between the multiple light sources 212. Through the second elastic The support member 900 transmits the vibration force of the sound-generating component to the display panel 100, thereby achieving the integration of audio and video while avoiding affecting the light emission of the light source 212.
  • the backlight module 200 may also include a substrate, which is a honeycomb board or a carbon fiber board.
  • a substrate which is a honeycomb board or a carbon fiber board.
  • the thickness of the honeycomb board is 1 to 4mm.
  • the honeycomb core material can be paper, aramid, metal, or other rigid foam materials.
  • Honeycomb panel skin materials include but are not limited to glass fiber, carbon fiber, glass-carbon hybrid fiber, plastic, lightweight aluminum, etc.
  • the substrate is also the heat conduction and heat dissipation plate of the mini-LED backlight panel 210.
  • the substrate is a rectangular flat plate, and the substrate and the backlight panel 210 are bonded with double-sided tape.
  • the substrate connects adjacent backlight panels 210 to each other, so that all the backlight panels 210 are connected into one complete panel. There are tight seams between the backlight panels 210 and the backlight panels 210 .
  • the compression change process of the second elastic support member 900 will be described in detail below.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a second elastic support member provided on multiple backlight boards of a display device provided by an embodiment of the present application in a static state
  • Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of a second elastic support member provided on multiple backlight boards of a display device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of the free contact state of the second elastic support member provided on multiple backlight panels of the display device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • One end of the second elastic support member 900 is in contact with the backlight plate 210 and the other end is in contact with the diffusion film 220.
  • the second elastic support member 900 When placed statically, as shown in Figure 25, the second elastic support member 900 is in an interference compression state; when the actuator 400 moves toward When the side close to the display panel 100 is pushed, as shown in FIG. 26 , the second elastic support member 900 is in a further overpressure state; as shown in FIG. 27 , when the actuator 400 vibrates toward the side away from the backlight plate 210 , the second elastic support member 900 is in a further overpressure state.
  • the support 900 is in free contact.
  • At least two actuators 400 may be provided, and the at least two actuators 400 are spaced apart in a direction parallel to the display panel 100 , and a plurality of second exciters 400 are provided.
  • the elastic support member 900 includes at least two groups of vibration transmission members 400.
  • the second elastic support member 900 in each group of vibration transmission members 400 is arranged around the outside of the corresponding exciter 400. In this way, different positions in the circumferential direction of the exciter 400 can be adjusted.
  • the optical film assembly 230 at the position is supported, and the vibration transmission effect at different circumferential positions of the exciter 400 is better.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be selected as a silicone member or a rubber member to ensure that it has a certain amount of compression.
  • the sound-generating component further includes a reinforcing plate 600 .
  • the reinforcing plate 600 is disposed on the side of the backlight plate 210 facing away from the display panel 100 .
  • the exciter 400 is disposed on the side of the reinforcing plate 600 facing away from the display panel 100 .
  • the sound-generating component is used to drive the backlight panel 210 to vibrate and produce sound.
  • the specific sound transmission path is: a gas layer is formed between the backlight plate 210 and the display panel 100, and a plurality of second elastic supports 900 are provided in the gas layer, that is, the second elastic supports 900 are provided between the backlight plate 210 and the display panel.
  • the backlight plate 210 when the exciter 400 vibrates, the backlight plate 210 is driven to vibrate.
  • the backlight plate 210 will transmit the vibration to the second elastic support member 900, and the second elastic support member 900 will then transmit the vibration to the display panel 100, thereby realizing display.
  • the spontaneous sound of the panel 100 further realizes the integration of audio and video of the display device 10 and enhances the user's sensory experience.
  • the actuator 400 can be directly fixed on the side of the backlight plate 210 opposite to the display panel 100 , or the actuator 400 can be disposed on the reinforcing plate 600 first, and then the reinforcing plate 600 can be connected to the backlight plate 210 .
  • the indirect fixing of the actuator 400 is achieved by fitting and fixing. This arrangement can facilitate the fixing of the actuator 400 and avoid damage to the backlight plate 210 caused by direct fixing.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be disposed in the gap between any two adjacent backlight panels 210 to form a buffer between the two adjacent backlight panels 210 .
  • the clamping hole 2111 penetrates the backlight plate body 211, part of the adhesive member is exposed at the clamping hole 2111, and the end of the second elastic support member 900 can be fixed to the reinforcing plate 600 through the adhesive member. connect.
  • the reinforcing board 600 is a sandwich board or a carbon fiber board.
  • the sandwich board can be any one of a honeycomb sandwich board, a foam sandwich board, a wood sandwich board, and an acrylic board, which is low-cost and easy to obtain.
  • the honeycomb sandwich panel can be aluminum honeycomb sandwich panel, aramid honeycomb sandwich panel, etc.
  • the foam sandwich panel can be polyvinyl chloride (Polyvinyl chloride, PVC) foam sandwich panel, polymethacrylimide ( PMI) foam sandwich board, etc.
  • the wood sandwich board can be balsa wood and other balsa wood.
  • the sound quality of a sound can be measured from aspects such as volume, frequency response range, and timbre.
  • the sound emitted by the sandwich panel has a higher volume, wider and smaller audio response than the sound emitted by the aluminum plate. That is to say, by arranging the reinforcing plate 600, the sound emitted by the display device 10 can have a smaller sound. Good sound quality.
  • the sandwich panel includes a core material and a skin, and the skins are attached to opposite sides of the core material.
  • the material of the skin can be glass fiber cloth, carbon fiber cloth, glass-carbon hybrid fiber, aluminum paper, plastic, etc.
  • the material of the core material can be paper, aramid, metal, or other rigid foam materials.
  • the damping of the reinforcing plate 600 is greater than the damping of the backlight plate body 211.
  • its density and mass are both smaller.
  • the equivalent damping of the backlight plate 210 can be improved, the equivalent density of the backlight plate 210 can be reduced, the bending modulus of the backlight plate 210 can be increased, and the number of modal resonant frequencies can be increased, so that the transmission to the display panel can be
  • the frequency response of the display panel 100 is improved, which expands the frequency range of the sound emitted by the display panel 100 and avoids obvious peaks and valleys and distortion in the audio response of the display panel 100 that affect the sense of hearing.
  • the reinforcing plate 600 is a continuous solid structure, it can reduce the reflection of sound waves in the gaps between two adjacent backlight plates 210 and prevent the excited sound waves from being distorted by multiple reflections in the gaps.
  • multiple backlight panels 210 are arranged side by side on the reinforcing plate 600 .
  • the gap between two adjacent backlight panels 210 should be as small as possible to avoid interference between two adjacent backlight panels 210 .
  • the gap between them will cause segmentation vibration and affect the acoustic effect.
  • the gap between two adjacent backlight panels 210 is too small, when the exciter 400 drives the backlight panels 210 to vibrate, a collision will occur between the two adjacent backlight panels 210, thereby generating noise. Therefore, the gap between two adjacent backlight panels 210 needs to be strictly controlled, where the gap between two adjacent backlight panels 210 may be 1 mm to 2 mm.
  • the backlight panel 210 and the reinforcement panel 600 can be positioned through a plurality of positioning members 610 (As shown in Figures a to c in Figure 76 ), correspondingly, the backlight plate 210 and the reinforcing plate 600 are provided with positioning holes (not shown) for the positioning members 610 to pass through.
  • positioning members 610 As shown in Figures a to c in Figure 76 , different assembly methods can be adopted.
  • the positioning component 610 when the positioning component 610 is an SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) positioning nail (as shown in Figure 76a), the positioning component 610 can be assembled by patch method, or the positioning component 610 can be fixed by bonding, welding, etc. During the assembly process, the positioning member 610 can first be inserted into the positioning hole of the backlight plate 210, and then the positioning member 610 can be inserted into the positioning hole of the reinforcement plate 600 for pre-positioning, and then the backlight plate 210 and the reinforcement plate 600 are attached. In this way, the positioning accuracy between the backlight plate 210 and the reinforcing plate 600 is relatively high.
  • the material of the positioning nail can be metal, plastic, etc.
  • the positioning member 610 is a pre-positioning fixture (as shown in Figure 76 b), which is sequentially inserted into the positioning holes of the backlight panel 210 and the reinforcing plate 600 through the pre-positioning fixture. It can be understood that at this time, after the backlight plate 210 and the reinforcing plate 600 are bonded together, the pre-positioning tooling needs to be removed.
  • the positioning member 610 can also be connected to the second elastic support member 900 as a whole (as shown in Figure 76c). In this way, when the second elastic support member 900 is installed, the positioning member can be 610 passes through the positioning hole of the backlight plate 210, which makes assembly difficult, and there is no need to remove the positioning member 610 after the backlight plate 210 and the reinforcement plate 600 are attached to form a positioning function for the backlight plate 210 and the reinforcement plate 600.
  • the material of the positioning member 610 can be metal, plastic, etc.
  • each backlight panel 210 in order to allow the exciter 400 to excite richer vibration modes, can be arranged with unequal areas (as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 ), for example, the board area of each backlight panel 210 are different, in this way, the sound quality of the sound emitted by the display device 10 is better.
  • each driver chip 230 can control a fixed number of light sources 212 (for example, 9), then each backlight panel 210
  • the number of light sources 212 may be a multiple of the fixed number (for example, 9, 18, 27, etc.). In this way, the backlight panels 210 can be arranged in unequal areas and the algorithm of the driving chip 230 can be simplified.
  • the display device 10 has four exciters 400, the two exciters 400 on the left are used to form the left channel, and the two exciters on the right are used to form the right channel.
  • the lateral length of the backlight plate 210 (which is provided with 54 light sources 212) where the four exciters 400 are located can be the same as the length of the reinforcement plate 600, so as to excite the low-frequency mode.
  • the multiple backlight panels 210 on the upper and lower sides of the four exciters 400 are arranged in unequal areas to disperse the resonance points, and the multiple backlight panels 210 are symmetrically arranged left and right.
  • the backlight panels 210 arranged in unequal areas are respectively provided with 9 light sources 212 and 18 light sources 212 .
  • the display device 10 may be provided with multiple sound channels, such as two sound channels (as shown in FIG. 77 ), four sound channels (as shown in FIG. 79 ), etc.
  • the gap between the backlight panels 210 in adjacent sound channels can be increased, which can consume a large amount of vibration, so as to avoid the impact of vibration between adjacent sound channels, that is, by reducing the display device Equipped with 10 low-frequency effects to improve the sense of positioning between different channels.
  • first gap C1 between the left channel and the right channel in Figure 78
  • second gap C2 between the upper channel and the lower channel in Figure 79
  • second gap C2 between the left channel and the right channel in Figure 79
  • third gap C3 in between, where the sizes of the first gap C1, the second gap C2, and the third gap C3 can be set as needed.
  • the display device 10 when the size of the display device 10 is small, as shown in FIG. 80 , the display device 10 may be provided with only one backlight panel 210 , and in order to support the backlight panel 210 , the display device 10 may be provided with a reinforcing plate 600 . In some embodiments, at this time, the backlight plate 210 can also be fixed on the back plate 300 through threaded fasteners, rivets, etc.
  • the outside of the threaded metal parts is also It is necessary to cover the second elastic buffer, where part of the second elastic buffer is provided between the head of the threaded fastener and the backlight panel 210 , and part of the second elastic buffer is provided between the backlight panel 210 and the back panel 300 .
  • a plurality of elastic feet 470 may be provided on the circumferential outside of the actuator body 410, and the material of the elastic feet 470 may be metal or plastic. As shown in Figures 71 and 72, the number of elastic legs 470 can be 3-5, and the actuator body 410 is connected to the backplane 300 or the backlight plate 210 through the elastic legs 470.
  • the actuator body 410 When the exciter body 410 is elastically connected to the back plate 300 through rubber, silicone or other elastic materials (ie, elastic legs 470), the actuator body 410 can reciprocate relative to the back plate 300 during the vibration of the actuator 420. At this time, the actuator 400 also forms a nearly inertial driving mode to drive the backlight panel 210 to vibrate, so as to avoid affecting the frequency response of the display device 10 due to the relative fixation of the actuator body 410 and the back panel 300 .
  • the back plate 300 is a metal piece, which can provide better support for the actuator body 410 .
  • the plurality of elastic legs 470 are arranged at intervals along the circumferential direction of the actuator body, so that there are multiple connection positions between the actuator body and the display panel 100, and the fixation stability of the actuator 400 is high.
  • the elastic legs 470 protrude from the outer wall of the actuator body and are connected to the back panel 300 or the backlight panel 210 . Since the elastic legs 470 can elastically deform, the actuator body and the backlight plate 210 can move relative to each other. That is, during the vibration process of the actuator 400, the actuator body can vibrate relative to the backlight plate 210, so that the actuator 400 forms an inertia drive mode. Driving the display panel 100 to vibrate helps to stimulate low-frequency sound with better sound effects.
  • the elastic legs 470 can extend in a straight direction (not shown), and the structure is relatively simple and easy to form.
  • the elastic legs 470 can also extend along the circumference of the exciter body 410 (as shown in FIG. 71 ), that is, the elastic legs 470 are arc-shaped. In this way, the elastic legs 470 have a larger length and can have a larger diameter.
  • the amount of elastic deformation can have a large relative displacement between the actuator body and the back plate 300 or the backlight plate 210, which can easily cause the actuator 400 to form an inertia drive mode to drive the backlight plate 210 to vibrate, which is helpful to stimulate better sound effects. Low frequency sound.
  • the free end of the elastic leg 470 may also have a branch structure to increase its connection position with the back panel 300 or the backlight panel 210 and improve the connection stability.
  • the elastic legs 470 can also be in a wavy bending shape, so that the elastic legs 470 have a larger amount of elastic deformation. This embodiment does not limit the shape, size, etc. of the elastic legs 470 .
  • the actuator body 410 is connected to the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the U iron 442 is connected to the backlight plate 210 through elastic legs 470.
  • the end of the elastic legs 470 is provided with a third elastic buffer member.
  • the third elastic buffer member is a damping block 480, such as double-sided tape or foam. Cotton etc. In this way, a large relative movement range between the elastic legs 470 and the backlight panel 210 can be allowed, which helps the actuator 400 to drive the display panel 100 to vibrate in an inertial driving manner.
  • the voice coil can generate higher frequency vibration and drive the backlight panel 210 to vibrate.
  • the exciter body 410 can drive the backlight panel 210 to vibrate with a lower frequency vibration, that is, The actuator body 410 vibrates along with the vibration of the backlight panel 210 , and the actuator 400 forms an inertial driving mode to drive the backlight panel 210 to vibrate.
  • the backlight plate body 211 adds a vibration weight.
  • the flat panel is equivalently formed. In terms of structure, it is equivalent to increasing the equivalent density of the flat plate structure and reducing the first-order mode frequency f11, which helps to stimulate low-frequency sounds with better sound effects.
  • the actuator body 410 can also be connected to the back plate 300 .
  • the elastic feet 470 are connected to the back plate 300 through fixing pins, and the fixing pins can be perpendicular to the back plate 300.
  • the display device 10 further includes a first elastic support 460, and the actuator body 410 is supported through the first elastic support. Component 460 is connected to the backplane 300.
  • the material of the first elastic support member 460 can be silicone, rubber, etc., and the first elastic support member 460 can be sleeved on the outside of the fixing pin. In this way, both sides of the extension part are provided with part of the first elastic support member 460, that is, the cross-sectional shape of the first elastic support member 460 can be approximately I-shaped, so as to avoid the elastic legs 470 during the vibration of the exciter 400.
  • This embodiment does not limit the structure, material, etc. of the first elastic support member 460 if it interferes with the fixing pin or the back plate 300 .
  • the elastic force direction of the first elastic support member 460 is parallel to the thickness direction of the display device 10 so that the actuator body 410 and the back plate 300 have a variable relative position. That is to say, during the vibration process of the actuator 400, the actuator body 410 can move back and forth relative to the back plate 300. At this time, the actuator 400 also forms an approximate inertial driving mode to drive the backlight plate 210 to vibrate, so as to avoid the interaction between the actuator body 410 and the back plate 300.
  • the plate 300 is relatively fixed, affecting the frequency response of the display device 10 .
  • the deformation of the middle position of the backlight plate 210 is greater relative to its edge position.
  • the voice coil may be stretched or compressed due to the deformation of the backlight plate 210. , causing the voice coil to deviate from the center of the magnetic field.
  • the position of the voice coil can be adjusted, that is, the voice coil can be adaptively adjusted through the first elastic support member 460 to avoid collision and interference between the voice coil and the U-iron 442 or the washer 443.
  • the number of actuators 400 may be one or more, and multiple actuators 400 are arranged at intervals.
  • multiple exciters 400 can constitute a stereo system, that is, different exciters 400 can belong to different channels. It can be understood that each channel can correspond to one or more exciters 400, thereby improving the user experience.
  • this embodiment may adopt a multi-modal high-frequency vibration bending wave superposition method.
  • the display device 10 further includes a partition 700. Two ends of the partition 700 are respectively connected to the back plate 300 and the rear case 500 to separate the sound cavity Q into a plurality of resonant cavities X. In this way, each The sound waves emitted by the vibrating plate 430 in the resonant cavity X can resonate in the corresponding resonant cavity X.
  • each resonant cavity X can be different, so that each resonant cavity Large sound pressure level.
  • the partition 700 may include sound-insulating material.
  • one end of the partition 700 is fixedly connected to one of the back panel 300 and the rear case 500 , and the other end is spaced apart from the other one of the back panel 300 and the rear case 500 .
  • the first end of the partition 700 is integrally formed with the rear case 500 , and the space between the second end of the partition 700 and the back panel 300 is filled with sound-insulating sponge 710 .
  • each resonant cavity X is provided with at least one exciter 400, that is, each resonant cavity P is used to derive the sound waves emitted by the vibration of the vibrating plate 430 to compensate for high frequencies.
  • the shape and size of the resonant cavity X and the location of the exciter 400 in the resonant cavity X can be determined through modal analysis, and are not limited in this embodiment.
  • a plurality of exciters 400 are arranged at intervals along the horizontal direction.
  • the partition 700 separates the sound cavity Q into two resonant cavities X.
  • Each resonant cavity X extends along the horizontal direction.
  • the two resonant cavities The sound outlet P of X is located on the left and right sides of the display device 10 respectively.
  • the sound path length of the resonant cavity Twice or more, the exciter 400 can be positioned at any antinode position that is one-half the wavelength of the sound wave.
  • the sound outlet P may be located at any side position of the display device 10, such as the left side, the right side, or the upper side.
  • the sound outlet P can propagate high-frequency sound waves toward the front or side of the display device 10 .
  • the display device 10 further includes a filling layer 905 , by disposing the filling layer 905 in the gas layer M formed between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 to reduce the The gap between the gas layer M between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 is used to increase the sensitivity of the gas layer M to pressure changes caused by the vibration deformation of the backlight plate body 211, thereby achieving the purpose of improving the sound effect of the display panel 100. .
  • the filling layer 905 is laid on the side of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100 and is connected to the backlight plate body 211 .
  • the filling layer 905 can be bonded to the side of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100 through foam double-sided tape, UV glue, etc., so as to reduce the gap between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 through the filling layer 905 The gap between the gas layer M.
  • the filling layer 905 can also be connected to the backlight plate body 211 through clamping, threaded connection, etc., as long as the filling layer 905 and the backlight plate body 211 can be connected.
  • the height of the filling layer 905 is smaller than the gap of the gas layer M between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 , so that the gap between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 is reduced.
  • the gap of the gas layer M remains stable, so that the actuator 400 drives the backlight plate body 211 to vibrate, and drives the display panel 100 to vibrate and produce sound through the gas layer M, while ensuring that the gas layer M caused by the vibration deformation of the backlight plate body 211 is ensured.
  • Air pressure changes have high sensitivity, thereby achieving the purpose of improving the sound effect of the display panel 100 .
  • the height of the filling layer 905 refers to the size of the filling layer 905 in the direction extending from the side of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100 to the side of the display panel 100 .
  • the height of the filling layer 905 is lower than the height of the light source 212 so that the filling layer 905 can avoid the direct illumination range of the light source 212 and prevent the filling layer 905 from interfering with the direct illumination path of the light source 212 and affecting the display panel 100 display effect.
  • the projection of the filling layer 905 on the backlight panel body 211 covers the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the area of the filling layer 905 is equal to the area of the backlight panel body 211 , so that the filling layer 905 is formed on the backlight panel 211 .
  • the projection on the panel body 211 coincides with the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the filling layer 905 is provided on the side of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100, and the projection of the filling layer 905 on the backlight plate 210 covers the backlight plate body 211. In this way, the filling layer 905 can be
  • the integrated structure can reduce the manufacturing process and installation process of the filling layer 905, thereby reducing the manufacturing and installation costs.
  • the filling layer 905 may be provided with through holes for installing the light source 212.
  • the filling layer 905 may be provided with spaced-apart through holes through integral molding. holes, so that the lamp beads are placed in the through holes and connected to the backlight plate body 211; alternatively, the light source 212 is a light bar structure arranged horizontally or vertically, and can also be provided on the filling layer 905 for placement through an integrated molding process.
  • the light bar has a through hole that matches the shape of the light bar, so that the light bar is placed in the through hole and connected to the backlight panel body 211 .
  • the lamp beads or light strips are installed in the through holes on the filling layer 905, the lamp beads or light strips protrude from the filling layer 905 so that the lamp beads or light strips can emit light normally, and the filling layer 905 is incorrect.
  • the direct illumination range of lamp beads or light strips only needs to cause interference.
  • only the filling layer 905 or only the filling protrusions 901 may be provided in the gas layer M, and the gap of the gas layer M is reduced by the filling layer 905 or the filling protrusions 901 .
  • the display device 10 may further include a plurality of filling protrusions 901 and a filling layer 905 .
  • the plurality of filling protrusions 901 are spaced apart on the filling layer 905 .
  • the gas layer M formed between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 is reduced, so as to increase the gas pressure of the gas layer M caused by the vibration deformation of the backlight plate body 211.
  • the sensitivity of the display panel 100 is changed to achieve the purpose of improving the sound effect of the display panel 100 .
  • the filling layer 905 is laid on the surface of the side of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100 , and a plurality of filling protrusions 901 are disposed between the filling layer 905 and the display panel 100 , wherein the filling protrusions 901 Wako
  • the sources 212 each protrude from the surface of the filling layer 905 facing the display panel 100 .
  • the filling protrusions 901 are disposed between any adjacent light sources 212, so that the filling protrusions 901 can avoid the direct illumination range of the light sources 212, thereby improving the display effect of the display panel 100.
  • the gap of the gas layer M between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 can be further reduced.
  • each filling protrusion 901 can be connected to the filling layer 905 to form an integral structure to facilitate installation, reduce installation difficulty, and thereby reduce installation costs.
  • each filling protrusion 901 and the filling layer 905 can be formed into one piece through an integral molding process such as injection molding.
  • an integral molding process such as injection molding.
  • the cross-sectional size of the filling protrusions 901 provided on the filling layer 905 gradually decreases to form a cone-shaped structure, such as a quadrangular pyramid, etc., to avoid the filling protrusions 901.
  • 901 causes interference to the direct illumination range of the light source 212, affecting the display effect of the display panel 100.
  • the filling protrusions 901 provided on the filling layer 905 are spaced between any adjacent light sources 212 , for example, the filling protrusions 901 are provided between any four adjacent light sources 212 , etc., so that each The filling protrusions 901 are arranged outside the direct illumination area of the light source 212, which can prevent the filling protrusions 901 from blocking the illumination path of the light source 212, thereby avoiding problems such as dark spots on the display panel 100, thereby improving the display effect of the display panel 100.
  • the height of the filling protrusion 901 protruding from the filling layer 905 may be less than or equal to the height of the light source 212 protruding from the filling layer 905 , so that the filling protrusion 901 is disposed outside the direct illumination area of the light source 212 .
  • the filling protrusions 901 and the filling layer 905 can be made of lightweight and high-density materials.
  • lightweight and high-density foaming materials such as melamine materials, can be used.
  • the display device may also include a second elastic support member 900 .
  • the material of the second elastic support member 900 may be silicone or rubber.
  • the number of second elastic support members 900 may be There are a plurality of second elastic supporting members 900 arranged at intervals.
  • One end of the second elastic support member 900 is connected to the backlight plate body 211, and the other end is in contact with the display panel 100, so that the second elastic support member 900 is supported between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100.
  • the gap between the gas layer M is kept stable to prevent the gas layer M between the light source 212 and the display panel 100 from vibrating and deforming, causing sound contact between the light source 212 and the display panel 100 to generate noise, thereby improving the performance of the display panel 100 Sound effects.
  • the second elastic support member 900 is fixedly connected to the backlight panel body 211.
  • the second elastic support member 900 can be bonded and fixed to the backlight panel body 211 through a third adhesive member, wherein the third adhesive member
  • the adhesive member may be UV glue, double-sided foam tape, etc. to prevent the second elastic support member 900 from moving relative to the backlight plate body 211, thereby improving the support reliability of the second elastic support member 900.
  • the shape of the cross section of the second elastic support member 900 may be a rectangle, a cone, a trapezoid, a dumbbell shape, or other shapes.
  • the second elastic support member 900 may be a cone-shaped structure or a quadrangular pyramid-shaped structure, and the cross-sectional size of the second elastic support member 900 may gradually decrease from one end of the backlight plate body 211 to one end of the display panel 100 Small, the light beam emitted by the light source 212 is adjacent to the outer wall surface of the second elastic support member 900, that is, the second elastic support member 900 is not disposed on the path of the light emitted by the light source 212. In this way, the brightness distribution of the display screen can be improved Relatively uniform.
  • the backlight plate body 211 or the display panel 100 may be deformed during the assembly process of the display device. That is, at different positions of the display device, the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 may be deformed. The gaps between the panels 100 are different.
  • the gap between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 can be maintained to a predetermined value. Within the range, the light source 212 and the display panel 100 are prevented from contacting each other at a certain position.
  • the display panel 100 and the light source 212 may also be in contact with each other in the thickness direction of the display device 10. In this way, the gap of the gas layer M is smaller and the thickness of the display device is smaller. At this time, the light source 212 can be made of soft packaging material to avoid noise caused by rigid contact between the display panel 100 and the light source 212 .
  • the display panel 100 and the light source 212 may be spaced apart to prevent the display panel from A rigid collision between the panel 100 and the light source 212 generates noise.
  • the filling protrusion 901 protrudes from the backlight plate body 211 and extends toward one side of the display panel 100 , and the height of the filling protrusion 901 is the same as the gap of the gas layer M, that is, one end of the filling protrusion 901 is in contact with the backlight.
  • the backlight plate body 211 is connected, and the other end of the filling protrusion 901 is in contact with the display panel 100, as shown in Figure 52.
  • the filling protrusion 901 can evolve into a second elastic support member 900 to support the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100.
  • the display panel 100 is supported so that the gap of the gas layer M formed between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 can be maintained stable.
  • the filling protrusion 901 can also evolve into a second elastic support for transmitting vibrations. , so as to transmit the vibration of the backlight plate body 211 to the display panel 100 through the filling protrusions 901, so that the vibration transmission efficiency can be improved.
  • the filling protrusions 901 can also be fixed on the backlight plate body 211 by bonding, threading or snapping.
  • the number of components in the display device 10 can be reduced, thereby reducing installation process steps and reducing process costs.
  • a filling layer 905 is provided in the gas layer M and a plurality of filling protrusions 901 are provided on the filling layer 905 .
  • the filling protrusions 901 protrude from the filling layer 905 toward the display panel. 100 extends on one side, and the filling layer 905 has the same height as the filling protrusion 901 and the gap with the gas layer M, that is, the filling layer 905 is laid on the side of the backlight plate body 211 facing the display panel 100 and is connected to it, filling One end of the protrusion 901 is fixedly connected to the filling layer 905, and the other end of the filling protrusion 901 is in contact with the display panel 100.
  • the filling layer 905 and the filling protrusion 901 evolve together into the second elastic support member 900 to support the backlight panel.
  • the plate body 211 and the display panel 100 are supported so that the gap of the gas layer M formed between the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel 100 can be kept stable.
  • the filling layer 905 and the filling protrusions 901 provided on the filling layer 905 can also evolve into a second elastic support for transmitting vibration, so as to transmit the vibration of the backlight plate body 211 to the display panel through the filling protrusions 901 100, in this way, the vibration transmission efficiency can be improved.
  • the surface of the filling protrusion 901 may be provided with a reflective layer 511.
  • the reflective layer 511 covers the surface of the filling protrusion 901. .
  • the display effect of the display panel 100 can be improved.
  • the reflective layer 511 can be a diffuse reflective film layer.
  • a reflective layer 511 of a diffuse reflective material can be attached to the surface of the filling protrusion 901 through spraying, pasting or other processes, thereby reducing the size of the filling protrusion 901 Absorption of light.
  • the layer 905 and the filling protrusion 901 are both provided with a reflective layer 511 on the surface of the filling protrusion 901 to reduce the absorption of the light emitted by the light source 212 by the filling protrusion 901, thereby improving the display effect of the display panel 100.
  • the display device can be provided with the second elastic support 900 , the filling protrusion 901 and/or the filling layer 905 at the same time, for example, when multiple filling bodies are provided in the gas layer M , or a filling layer 905 and a filling protrusion 901 provided on the filling layer 905 are provided in the gas layer M, one end of the elastic support is connected to the backlight plate body 211, and the other end of the second elastic support 900 is in contact with the display panel , and the end of the filling protrusion 901 facing the display panel can be in contact with the display panel, or there can be a gap between the filling protrusion 901 and the display panel, that is, the end of the filling protrusion 901 facing the display panel is lower than the height of the second elastic support member 900 .
  • the filling protrusion 901 is only used to reduce the gap of the gas layer M.
  • the second elastic support member 900 is used to reduce the gap of the gas layer M and is mainly used to reduce the gap of the gas layer M.
  • both the filling protrusion 901 and the second elastic support member 900 are in contact with the display panel. In this way, Filling protrusion 901 and second elastic support member 900 While jointly reducing the gap of the gas layer M, the backlight plate body 211 and the display panel can also be jointly supported, which can improve the support reliability of the display panel.
  • the gas layer M is only provided with the filling layer 905, and the second elastic support member 900 protrudes from the surface of the filling layer 905 and contacts the display panel.
  • the filling layer 905 is used to reduce the gap of the gas layer M
  • the second elastic support 900 is used to reduce the gap of the gas layer M.
  • the support member 900 is used to support the display panel to prevent the display panel from deforming and causing the light source 212 to come into contact with the display panel.
  • Figure 82 is a schematic cross-sectional view eight of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application
  • Figure 83 is a schematic cross-sectional view nine of the internal structure of a display device provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • multiple exciters 400 can be provided, and the multiple exciters 400 can be evenly provided on the side of the backlight plate away from the display panel; or, they can also be provided as needed.
  • Non-uniform settings. Different exciters 400 can belong to different sound channels, and the exciters 400 of different sound channels can vibrate independently.
  • two adjacent exciters 400 can be isolated by a channel isolation structure 906, that is, the channel isolation structure 906 is arranged between the areas where different exciters 400 are located, thereby improving
  • the voice isolation between each channel reduces the vibration impact between the vibration areas of each channel and improves the sound effect of the display device.
  • the channel isolation structure 906 is used to isolate the two left and right exciters 400; as shown in Figure 83, two channel isolation structures 906 are provided to separate the areas where the three exciters 400 are located. It is understood that the embodiments of the present application can be extended to improve the isolation of more vocal channel vibration areas.
  • the vocal channel isolation structure 906 may be made of elastic buffer material.
  • the vocal channel isolation structure 906 may be an isolation bar made of elastic buffer material.
  • the isolation bar is disposed between two adjacent exciters 400 . between.
  • the number of isolation bars between two adjacent actuators 400 may be one or more.
  • the number of isolation bars between two adjacent actuators 400 is three. .
  • the installation process is difficult and complicated.
  • multiple filling bumps 901 can be connected into one body through the sound channel isolation structure 906.
  • the vocal channel isolation structure 906 and the corresponding filling protrusion 901 can be integrally formed. In this way, the installation difficulty of the filling protrusion 901 can be effectively reduced.
  • the filling protrusions 901 on adjacent channel isolation structures 906 can be arranged in a staggered manner (as shown in FIG. 82 ), so that the vibrations can be effectively attenuated in the channel isolation structure 906 for further optimization.
  • the voice isolation between each channel reduces the vibration impact between the vibration areas of each channel, thereby improving the sound effect of the display device.
  • the embodiment of the present application can also be extended to the case where the sound channel isolation structure 906 and the plurality of second elastic support members 900 are integrally formed. In this way, the difficulty of the installation process of the plurality of second elastic support members 900 can be reduced.
  • the backplane 300 includes a backplane body 310 , which is used to support the backlight panel 210 and the display panel 100 .
  • the backplane 300 also includes a first side panel 320 .
  • 320 extends along the edge of the back panel body 310 and protrudes from the back panel body 310 toward one side of the display panel 100, that is, the first side panel 320 protrudes from the front side of the back panel body 310. In this way, the first side panel 320 surrounds the back panel body 310.
  • the rear case 500 includes a rear case body 510 and a second side plate 520 .
  • the second side plate 520 extends along the edge of the rear case body 510 and protrudes from the rear case body 510 toward one side of the display panel 100 , that is to say, the rear case body 510 is located on the rear side of the back panel body 310 , the second side panel 520 protrudes from the front side of the rear case body 510 , and the second side panel 520 is located around the outside of the first side panel 320 .
  • the back panel body 310 and the rear case body 510 form a sound cavity Q, and part of the exciter body 410 extends into the sound cavity Q, that is, the vibrating piece 430 is located between the back panel body 310 and the rear case body 510 .
  • the sound outlet P may be formed on the rear case body 510 or the second side plate 520 . In some embodiments, the sound outlet P is located between the first side plate 320 and the second side plate 520 .
  • the sound outlet P may extend along the circumferential direction of the display device 10 , that is, the sound outlet P is formed on four sides of the display device 10 .
  • the sound outlet P may be provided at a part of a certain side.
  • the extension length of the opening of the resonant cavity X is smaller than the length of the left side of the display device 10 . That is to say, when the closing structure is not provided at a part of the first side plate 320 and the second side plate 520, the first side plate 320 and the second side plate 520 at this position will There is a gap between them, and the gap constitutes the sound outlet P.
  • the location and extension length of the sound outlet P can be set as needed.
  • a sound outlet P is provided on the sky side, the ground side, the left side, and the right side of the display device 10 .
  • a sealing process such as a rubber plug or a protruding bending portion is provided on the first side plate 320 or the second side plate 520 , to prevent dust and other foreign matter from entering the gap between the back plate 300 and the rear case 500 .
  • the sound outlet P can face different directions. For example, when both the first side panel 320 and the second side panel 520 protrude along the thickness direction of the display device 10, the sound outlet P faces the front of the display device 10 (as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58). When the second side panel 520 protrudes along the side of the display device 10, the sound outlet P may face the side front (as shown in FIG. 59).
  • the display device 10 further includes a plurality of second adhesive members 820 , and the second adhesive members 820 may be double-sided tape, Foam, etc.
  • a plurality of second adhesive members 820 are arranged at intervals and are used to connect the backlight plate body 211 and the back plate 300 so that the distances at different positions between the backlight plate body 211 and the back plate 300 are within a preset range. That is to say, different positions of the backlight plate body 211 have relatively uniform vibration amplitudes, which prevents noise from being generated during the vibration of the backlight plate 210 .
  • the backlight plate 210 can also be limited to prevent the backlight plate 210 from deforming after the display device 10 is assembled and affecting the vibration and sound generation of the backlight plate 210 .
  • the hardness of the second adhesive member 820 is smaller than the hardness of the first adhesive member 810 , that is, the hardness of the second adhesive member 820 is smaller. In this way, both Limiting the position of the backlight panel 210 will leave space for the backlight panel 210 to vibrate, thus preventing the low-frequency response of the backlight panel 210 from being affected.
  • the second adhesive members 820 may be distributed in a dot-like manner (not shown).
  • a plurality of actuators 400 are spaced apart along the horizontal direction, and the second adhesive member 820 can be in a strip shape and extend along the vertical direction.
  • the second adhesive member 820 is located on the second adhesive member 820 .
  • the exciters 400 on both sides of 820 have less influence on the other side. That is, when the left exciter 400 of the second adhesive member 820 vibrates, the backlight plate 210 located on the right side of the second adhesive member 820 may not vibrate driven by the left exciter 400 .
  • extension size of the second adhesive member 820 may be the same as the height of the display device 10 .
  • multiple second adhesive members 820 extending in the horizontal direction may also be provided.
  • the second adhesive members 820 are not used. Set the extension length and extension direction.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
  • Planar Illumination Modules (AREA)
  • Piezo-Electric Transducers For Audible Bands (AREA)
  • Diaphragms For Electromechanical Transducers (AREA)
  • Illuminated Signs And Luminous Advertising (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供一种显示设备，该显示设备包括显示面板；背光模组，背光模组包括背光板和光学膜组件，背光板包括背光板板体和光源，显示面板的边缘与背光板板体的边缘连接，以使显示面板与背光板板体之间形成气体层，光源位于气体层内；背板，背板设置在背光模组的背离显示面板的一侧，用于支撑背光模组与显示面板；激励器，激励器包括激励器本体和致动件，致动件与背光板板体连接，用于带动背光板板体振动，并经由气体层将背光板板体的振动传递至显示面板，以带动显示面板振动发声。本申请提供的显示设备可通过显示面板振动发声，易于实现音画合一，用户体验较好。

Description

显示设备
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2022年03月21日提交、申请号为202210281470.4；在2022年03月21日提交、申请号为202210279174.0；在2022年06月27日提交、申请号为202221622229.5；在2022年06月28日提交、申请号为202221634167.X；在2022年06月30日提交、申请号为202210756231.X的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及显示技术领域，尤其涉及一种显示设备。
背景技术
随着科技的发展和人们生活水平的提高，显示设备越来越多的应用在人们的工作和生活中。
现在的电视机等显示设备，不断在向着窄边框和轻薄化的方向发展，由于显示设备外观轻薄及安装位置所限，一般会将扬声器设置在显示屏幕下方或后方，即采用下出音或者后出音的方式，这样显示屏幕的正面看不到扬声器，外观较为美观。
然而，如此设置会导致形成的声像位置与图像位置分离，无法实现音画合一的视听体验，使得用户观感体验欠佳。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种显示设备，包括显示面板，用于显示图像信息；背光模组，所述背光模组包括背光板和光学膜组件，所述背光板包括背光板板体和光源，所述显示面板位于所述光学膜组件的出光侧，所述背光板位于所述光学膜组件的入光侧，所述显示面板的边缘与所述背光板板体的边缘连接，以使所述显示面板与所述背光板板体之间形成气体层，所述光源位于所述气体层内；背板，所述背板设置在所述背光模组的背离所述显示面板的一侧，用于支撑所述背光模组与所述显示面板；激励器，所述激励器包括激励器本体和致动件，所述致动件与所述背光板板体连接，用于带动所述背光板板体振动，并经由所述气体层将所述背光板板体的振动传递至所述显示面板，以带动所述显示面板振动发声。
附图说明
图1为根据本申请一些实施例的显示设备的结构示意图一；
图2为根据本申请一些实施例的显示设备的结构示意图二；
图3为根据本申请一些实施例的显示设备的结构示意图三；
图4为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的剖视图；
图5为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的另一剖视图；
图6为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的另一剖视图；
图7为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中气体层内设置填充凸起时的结构示意图；
图8为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中气体层内第二弹性支撑件的伸缩示意图；
图9为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件与背光板卡接时的结构示意图；
图10为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件与背光板卡接时的另一结构示意图；
图11为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件吸附固定时的结构示意图；
图12为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件的两端采用不同固定方式时的结构示意图；
图13为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件的结构示意图；
图14为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件的另一结构示意图；
图15为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件的另一结构示意图；
图16为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件的另一结构示意图；
图17为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中扩散膜与荧光膜之间设置防磨损件时的结构示意图；
图18为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中扩散膜与荧光膜之间设置防磨损件时的另一结构示意图；
图19为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中扩散膜与荧光膜之间设置防磨损件时的另一结构示意图；
图20为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件与第一连接件相连时的结构示意图；
图21为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件设置在相邻两个背光板之间时的结构示意图；
图22为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件设置在相邻两个背光板之间时的另一结构示意图；
图23A为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中第二弹性支撑件的分布示意图；
图23B为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的第一种排布示意图；
图23C为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的第二种排布示意图；
图24A为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板拼接结构示意图；
图24B为图24A中显示设备的剖视图；
图25为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的静止状态结构示意图；
图26为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的压缩状态结构示意图；
图27为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的自由接触状态结构示意图；
图28为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中背光板与隔离条的结构示意图；
图29为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中背光板与隔离条的另一结构示意图；
图30为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中显示面板与背光板板体的连接位置处设置导气通道时的结构示意图；
图31为图30中A部分局部放大时胶条的前视图；
图32为图31中设置过滤件时的结构示意图；
图33为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中致动件与后壳相连时的结构示意图；
图34为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中致动件与后壳相连时的另一结构示意图；
图35为图33中设置振动稳定件时的结构示意图；
图36为图34中设置振动稳定件时的结构示意图；
图37为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中振动稳定件的结构示意图；
图38为图31中设置弹性滤波件时的结构示意图；
图39为图31中设置弹性滤波件时的另一结构示意图；
图40为图34中设置弹性滤波件时的结构示意图；
图41为图34中设置弹性滤波件时的另一结构示意图；
图42为图31中贴装部件与后壳相连时的另一结构示意图；
图43为图34中贴装部件与后壳相连时的另一结构示意图；
图44为本申请一些实施例的显示设备设置后壳激励器时的结构示意图；
图45为本申请一些实施例的显示设备设置后壳激励器时的另一结构示意图；
图46为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中后壳上设置加强筋时的结构示意图；
图47为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中后壳设置多个子后壳时的结构示意图；
图48为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中后壳与背板相连的结构示意图；
图49为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图一；
图50为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图二；
图51为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图三；
图52为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图四；
图53为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图五；
图54为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图六；
图55为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图七；
图56为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的另一剖视图；
图57为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的另一剖视图；
图58为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的另一剖视图；
图59为本申请一些实施例的显示设备在激励器位置处的另一剖视图；
图60为本申请一些实施例的显示设备的另一结构示意图；
图61为本申请一些实施例的显示设备的另一结构示意图；
图62为本申请一些实施例的显示设备的另一结构示意图；
图63为本申请一些实施例的显示设备设置高频扬声器的结构示意图；
图64为图63中激励器与扬声器的控制原理图；
图65为图63中高频扬声器设置相位塞时的结构示意图；
图66为图64中高频扬声器的结构示意图；
图67为图63中声波传播示意图；
图68为图63中激励器与扬声器的另一控制原理图；
图69为本申请一些实施例的显示设备的支座上设置高频扬声器时的结构示意图；
图70为本申请一些实施例的显示设备的名称标识件与发声驱动器的结构示意图；
图71为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中激励器的另一结构示意图；
图72为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中激励器的另一结构示意图；
图73为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中激励器的另一结构示意图；
图74为图73中激励器的剖视图；
图75为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中背光板与加强板的结构示意图；
图76为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中背光板与加强板的定位示意图；
图77为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中多个背光板的结构示意图；
图78为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中多个背光板的另一结构示意图；
图79为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中多个背光板的另一结构示意图；
图80为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中显示设备的背光板上未设置加强板时的结构示意图；
图81为本申请一些实施例的显示设备中背光板与加强板的另一定位示意图；
图82为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图八；
图83为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图九。
附图标记：
10：显示设备；
100：显示面板；
200：背光模组；210：背光板；211：背光板板体；2111：卡接孔；2112：固定片；212：
光源；220：光学膜组件；221：荧光膜；222：扩散膜；223：增亮膜；230：驱动芯片；
300：背板；310：背板本体；320：第一侧板；330：定位柱；
400：激励器；
410：激励器本体；420：致动件；421：贴装部件；430：振动片；440：磁性组件；
441：通孔；442：U铁；443：华司；450：连接杆；460：第一弹性支撑件；470：弹性支脚；480：阻尼块；490：弹波；
401：线圈；402：伸缩件；403：第一移动部；404：第二移动部；405：磁性件；406：
连接部；
40a：振动稳定件；40b：弹性滤波件；
500、500'：后壳；501：子后壳；
510：后壳本体；520：第二侧板；530：安装孔；540：后壳激励器；550'：第一加强
筋；560：第二加强筋；570：第一弹性缓冲件；580：遮挡件；590：弹性阻尼件；511：反光层；
600：加强板；610：定位件；
700：分隔件；710：隔音海绵；
810：第一粘接件；811：导气通道；812：胶条；813：过滤件；820：第二粘接件；
900：第二弹性支撑件；
901：填充凸起；902：第一连接件；903：隔离条；904：防磨损件；9041：第一层；
9042：第二层；9043：第三层；9044：OCA光学胶层；9045：光学件；9046：滤光件；905：填充层；906：声道隔离结构；
910：支撑部件；920：弹性部件；
1000：高频扬声器；2000：高通滤波器；3000：相位塞；4000：引导弧面；5000：第
二延时器；6000：第二加和器；7010：第二连接件；7020：发声驱动器；8000：频段滤波器；9000：支座；
M：气体层；Q：出音腔体；X：谐振腔；P：出音口；L：出音路径长度；Y：等效长
度；D：等效直径；C1：第一间隙；C2：第二间隙；C3：第三间隙。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的上述目的、特征和优点能够更加明显易懂，下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。显然，所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请的一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动的前提下所获得的所有其它实施例，均属于本申请保护的范围。
需要说明的是，在本申请的描述中，术语“中心”、“上”、“下”、“前”、“后”、“左”、“右”、“竖直”、“水平”、“顶”、“底”、“内”、“外”等指示的方向或位置关系的术语是基于附图所示的方向或位置关系，这仅仅是为了便于描述，而不是指示或暗示装置或构件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作，因此不能理解为对本申请的限制。
相关技术中，显示设备可以采用扬声器发声，扬声器一般设置于显示设备的下侧或背侧，实现了显示设备的下出音或者后出音，但导致显示设备的画面与声像位置分离，无法实现音画合一，用户体验较差。或者，显示设备可以采用激励器带动显示面板振动发声。以OLED(Organic Light Emitting Diode，有机发光二极管)显示设备为例，OLED显示设备的显示面板包括有机自发光层，激励器可以与显示面板直接相连并带动显示面板振动发声。然而，对于液晶显示(Liquid Crystal Display，LCD)设备，显示面板本身不发光，需要背光源发光，其液晶显示器的显像原理是将液晶置于两片导电玻璃之间，靠两个电极间电场的驱动，引起液晶分子扭曲向列的电场效应，以控制背光源透射或遮蔽功能，从而将影像显示出来。若加上彩色滤光片，则可显示彩色影像。可见，背光源不能被遮挡，显示面板与背光源之间具有气体间隙，因此，液晶显示设备不能通过激励器带动显示面板振动发声。
有鉴于此，本申请实施例提供一种显示设备，激励器可通过显示面板与背光板之间的 气体层带动显示面板振动发声，声学效果较好，且易于实现音画合一。
请参阅图1至图6，本实施例提供一种显示设备10，显示设备10为液晶显示设备，显示设备10包括显示面板100、背光模组200、背板300和激励器400。
显示面板100，用于显示文字、图像等图像信息。其中，显示面板100包括触控玻璃和液晶屏。触控玻璃、液晶屏沿显示设备10的厚度方向依次堆叠。
显示设备10具有天侧、地侧、左侧、右侧以及前侧和后侧。显示设备10的左侧和右侧指的是用户朝向触控玻璃一侧且进行触控操作时用户的左侧和右侧。相应的，显示设备10朝向用户的一侧为前侧，显示设备10背离用户的一侧为后侧，显示设备10的上侧为天侧，显示设备10的下侧为地侧。这样，触控玻璃设置在液晶屏的前侧，用于对液晶屏形成防护。
液晶屏设置在触控玻璃的后侧，液晶屏包括彩膜(Color Filter，CF)基板、薄膜晶体管(Thin Film Transistor，TFT)基板(也称阵列基板)以及液晶(LC，Liquid Crystal)层，液晶层位于彩膜基板与阵列基板之间。其中，薄膜晶体管基板上设有数据线和扫描线，通过数据线和扫描线的通电与否来控制液晶分子改变方向，以将光源212的光线经由彩膜基板射出并生成预设颜色的画面。
背光模组200包括背光板210，背光板210用于产生光。背光板210包括背光板板体211和光源212，背光板板体211可以为铝板、印制电路板(Printed Circuit Board，PCB)等。光源212可以为发光二极管(Light-Emitting Diode，LED)，次毫米发光二极管(Mini-Light Emitting Diode，Mini LED)或微米级发光二极管(Micro-Light Emitting Diode，Micro LED)。光源212可以为多个并间隔设置在背光板板体211上。
在一些实施例中，考虑到显示设备10尺寸以及背光板板体211制作工艺等因素，显示设备10的尺寸通常大于背光板210的尺寸，即背光板210的个数通常为多个，多个背光板210阵列设置。示例性的，请参阅图3，显示设备10包括三个背光板210，三个背光板210沿显示设备10的横向排列。
背光模组200还包括光学膜组件220，显示面板100位于光学膜组件220的出光侧，背光板210位于光学膜组件220的入光侧。即显示面板100、光学膜组件220以及背光板210沿显示设备10的厚度方向堆叠。
根据光源212发射出的光线种类不同，光学膜组件220可以为不同的种类。例如，光源212发射出白光时，光学膜组件220可以包括反射片、导光板、增亮膜等。其中，反射片贴装在背光板板体211的设置光源212的侧面上，反射片可以将光源212产生的光线反射到出光方向上，从而使光源212发出的光均匀分布。导光板可以利用折射和全反射作用，将其入光侧的光线在出光侧射出，将线光源转化为面光源。
光源212发射出蓝光时，光学膜组件220可以包括依次堆叠的扩散膜222、荧光膜221和增亮膜223，扩散膜222设置在光源212的前侧，即设置在朝向背光板210的一侧，用户将多个光源212的光线混合均匀，即将点光源212转换为面光源212。荧光膜221将光源212发出的光线转换为白色光线，这样，可以不限制光源212发出的光线的颜色，光源212可以发出蓝色光线或紫色光线。增亮膜223用于提高光线的亮度。可以理解的，当光源212发射出白光时，光学膜组件220也可以包括扩散膜222、荧光膜221和增亮膜223，本实施例以光学膜组件220包括扩散膜222、荧光膜221和增亮膜223为例进行说明。
在一些实施例中，显示面板100的边缘与背光板板体211的边缘密封连接，如可以通过在背光板210四周边缘设置密封件，例如缓冲双面胶条而实现，以使显示面板100与背光板板体211之间形成密闭的气体层M，光源212位于气体层M内。
在一些实施例中，液晶屏、光学膜组件220可以相互压合，以避免液晶屏、增亮膜223、荧光膜221以及扩散膜222的两两之间具有可与外界空气进行流通的空气间隙。
在一些实施例中，液晶屏以及光学膜组件220还可以两两粘接固定，例如通过光敏胶(UV胶)、泡棉、双面胶等粘接固定。
也就是说，显示面板100与光学膜组件220可以通过粘接固定连接为一个整体，此时，气体层M形成在光学膜组件220与背光板板体211之间。
当液晶屏、光学膜组件220相互压合时，液晶屏与增亮膜223之间、增亮膜223与荧光膜221之间以及荧光膜221与扩散膜222之间均可以具有气体间隙，气体层M形成在显示面板100与背光板板体211之间，且该气体间隙处于封闭状态。
具体的，显示设备10包括具有粘性的第一粘接件810，第一粘接件810为双面胶或泡棉，其中，第一粘接件810沿背光板板体211的边缘延伸，光学膜组件220与背光板板体211通过第一粘接件810粘接固定，即扩散膜222与背光板板体211通过第一粘接件810粘接固定。这样，光学膜组件220与背光板210之间形成封闭的气体层M，气体层M内可以填充空气、氮气等。
气体层M封闭，也就是气体层M与外部空气之间不会相互流通。该气体层M可以等效为一个阻尼弹簧，用于传递背光板210与显示面板100之间的振动。
气体层M的间隙大小可以根据光源212的大小进行确定。在一些实施例中，该间隙可以为0.3mm-10mm，例如，光源212为次毫米发光二极管时，气体层M的间隙可以小于1mm。这里需要说明的是，本申请实施例涉及的数值和数值范围为近似值，受制造工艺的影响，可能会存在一定范围的误差，这部分误差本领域技术人员可以认为忽略不计。
在一些实施例中，气体层M的间隙较大时，例如该间隙为4mm-10mm时，背光板板体211振动时，气体层M内的气压变化敏感度较低，为提高激励器400的振动传递效率，可以在气体层M内设置填充物，以减小气体层M的气体体积，提高气压变化敏感度，从而达到提升显示面板100的发声效果的目的。
在一些实施例中，填充物可以与背光板板体211固定连接，例如粘接、卡接或螺接等。
示例性的，各填充物可通过显示设备还包括的第二粘接件820与背光板板体211粘接，以避免各填充物与背光板板体211之间发生相对移动；其中，第二粘接件820包括但不仅限于为UV胶、泡棉双面胶等。
或者，也可以在背光板板体211上设置卡接孔，填充物的一端卡接在卡接孔中，填充物的另一端朝向显示面板100的一侧延伸，以减小气体层M的间隙。
在一些实施例中，为避免过度增加背光板板体211的重量，填充物可以为重量较小的高密度发泡材料，例如三聚氰胺。
在一些实施例中，填充物的表面可以贴设反射件或喷涂反射材料，以减小填充物对光源212发射出的光线的吸收量。
其中，扩散膜222与光源212在显示设备10的厚度方向上可以相互抵接，这样，气体层M的间隙较小，显示设备10的厚度较小。此时，光源212可以采用软质封装材料，以避免扩散膜222与光源212之间因刚性碰撞生成杂音。
在一些实施例中，扩散膜222可以与光源212之间还可以间隔设置，以避免扩散膜222与光源212之间发生刚性碰撞生成杂音。
在一些实施例中，填充物可以为片状件，并铺设在背光板板体211上，填充物与光源212对应的位置处开设供光源212穿过的光源孔。在一些实施例中，请参阅图7，图7中的图a为背光板板体211的正视图，图7中的图b为图a的侧视图，其中，填充物还可以为多个填充凸起901，填充凸起901为柱状凸起，多个填充凸起901间隔设置，填充凸起901的横截面形状可以为锥形、三角形、梯形、圆形、椭圆形、矩形等。
另外，填充凸起901沿垂直显示面板100的截面形状的轮廓可以为直线、弧线、样条曲线或者呈阶梯状延伸的曲线等。
在一些实施例中，填充凸起901凸出背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧的板面并朝向显示面板100一侧延伸。示例性的，多个填充凸起901在背光板板体211上可以呈阵列排布，如在图7中，背光板板体211为矩形，多个填充凸起901在背光板板体211上呈矩阵排布。其中，各填充凸起901可以设置在相邻光源212之间的空间处，示例性的， 填充凸起901设置在任意两个相邻光源212之间，或者填充凸起901设置在任意四个相邻光源212之间等。
例如，当光源212为灯条时，填充凸起901位于相邻灯条之间；当光源212为灯珠时，填充凸起901位于任意两个灯珠之间，或者，填充凸起901位于任意四个相邻灯珠之间等。
在一些实施例中，背光板板体211上的多个填充凸起901沿垂直显示面板100的截面形状以及截面形状的轮廓可以相同也可以不同，例如，在图7中，多个填充凸起901呈矩阵排布，且每行或每列中的填充凸起901的截面形状可以相同，相邻行的填充凸起901的截面形状可以相同或者也可以不同。
在一些实施例中，为降低填充凸起901对光源212发射出的光线的影响，填充凸起901的横截面尺寸从背光板板体211的一端到扩散膜222的一端可以逐渐减小，例如，填充凸起901设置在任意相邻的四个光源212之间，填充凸起901为四棱柱锥形凸起，光源212发射出的光束与填充凸起901的外壁面相邻，即填充凸起901未设置在光源212的射出的光线的路径上。
在一些实施例中，填充凸起901的凸起高度小于或等于气体层M的间隙。
可以理解的是，气体层M的间隙指的是背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的距离，而填充凸起901的凸出高度指的是凸出背光板板体211板面向显示面板100一侧延伸的高度。
在一些实施例中，填充凸起901凸出于背光板板体211板面的凸出高度小于或等于气体层M的间隙，以使填充凸起901能够避让光源212的直射光照范围。
在一些实施例中，填充凸起901凸出于背光板板体211板面的凸出高度小于光源212凸出于背光板板体211板面的高度，以使凸起能够避让光源212的直射光照范围。
在一些实施例中，沿背光板板体211朝向显示面板100的延伸方向，填充凸起901的截面(该截面平行于显示面板100)尺寸逐渐减小，如图7中所示，填充凸起901为四棱柱、椭圆体等，以使填充凸起901位于光源212直射光照区域之外，降低填充凸起901对光源212直射光线的影响。
需要说明的是，各填充凸起901凸出于背光板板体211板面的凸出高度可以相等，也可以不相等；另外，各填充凸起901沿垂直显示面板100的截面形状可以相同，也可以不同，如图7中所示，各填充凸起901沿垂直显示面板100的截面形状不相同，且各填充凸起901凸出背光板板体211板面的凸出高度也不相等，以保证各填充凸起901能够避让相邻光源212的直射光照范围。
示例性的，考虑到越靠近激励器的位置，背光板的振动幅度越大，越远离激励单元的位置，背光板的振动幅度逐渐减小，因此，可以使靠近激励器的填充物与远离激励器的填充物的截面形状不同或者高度不同，在一些实施例中，以激励器为中心，越靠近激励器的位置，填充物可以采用高度较大的棱锥、圆锥等结构，而远离激励器的位置可以采用高度较小的椭圆体等，这样，当背光板带动显示面板振动时，靠近激励器的填充物可用于支撑显示面板，以使显示面板的不同位置具有较为均匀的振动幅度，从而提升显示面板的显示效果。
示例性的，在图7中，填充凸起901排列为四行，且相邻行的填充凸起901的截面形状和高度不同，而同一行的填充凸起901的截面形状和高度相同，例如，靠近激励器的填充凸起901的高度大于远离激励器的填充凸起901的高度，而靠近激励器的填充凸起901可用于支撑显示面板，从而使显示面板的不同位置具有较为均匀的振动幅度。
在一些实施例中，填充凸起901的排布形式、硬度、高度等可以进行任意组合。示例性的，当多个填充凸起901呈阵列排布时，可将不同位置处的填充凸起901设置为硬度不同；当多个填充凸起901呈非阵列的其他形式排布时，也可以同时将不同位置处的填充凸起901设置为硬度不同、高度不同。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下沿显示面板100垂向的高度从靠 近激励器本体410的一侧到远离激励器本体410的一侧逐渐减小，且第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下沿显示面板100垂向的高度大于其对应位置处气体层M的最大间距。
也就是说，为避免振动传递失效，第二弹性支撑件900与扩散膜222或背光板210出现分离时所需的第二弹性支撑件900高度，从靠近激励器本体410的一侧到远离激励器本体410的一侧逐渐减小。
那么，由于第二弹性支撑件900的高度不等设置，示例性的，第二弹性支撑件900的基础高度可以靠近激励器本体410位置处的第二弹性支撑件900高度为准，越远离激励器本体410，第二弹性支撑件900高度越小。
也就是说，通过将第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下的高度不等设置，能够以较低的制作成本，使得扩散膜222与背光板210之间的各个第二弹性支撑件900均处于过盈配合的压缩状态，即避免了靠近激励器本体410位置处的第二弹性支撑件900与扩散膜222或背光板210出现分离，扩散膜222与背光板210之间的支撑效果较好，振动传递效率较高。
考虑到振动传递损耗，越靠近激励器400的位置，振动强度越大，越远离激励器400的位置，振动强度逐渐减小，在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的分布密度和单个第二弹性支撑件900的支撑刚度中的至少一者，从靠近激励器本体410的一侧到远离激励器本体410的一侧逐渐减小。也就是说，越靠近激励器本体410的位置处，光学膜组件230所需的支撑强度越大，越远离激励器本体410的位置处，光学膜组件230所需的支撑强度越小。相应的，第二弹性支撑件900的分布密度、支撑刚度中的至少一者不等设置。
其中，当不同位置第二弹性支撑件900的分布面积不等时，越靠近激励器本体410的位置第二弹性支撑件900的排布个数越多，越远离激励器本体410的位置第二弹性支撑件900的排布个数越少。也就是说，越靠近激励器本体410的位置，有更多的第二弹性支撑件900参与支撑光学膜组件230并进行振动传递，支撑效果较好；且较多数量的第二弹性支撑件900共同进行支撑和振动传递，单个第二弹性支撑件900所承受的压力较小，第二弹性支撑件900的使用寿命较长；同时，即使靠近激励器本体410位置处的部分第二弹性支撑件900支撑失效，由于靠近激励器本体410位置处的第二弹性支撑件900数量较多，不会导致激励器本体410位置处的支撑失效以及振动传递失效。
当不同第二弹性支撑件900的支撑刚度不等时，越靠近激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的支撑刚度越大，越远离激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的支撑刚度越小。也就是说，越靠近激励器本体410的位置，第二弹性支撑件900抵抗变形的能力越强，可避免第二弹性支撑件900因过度伸缩导致弹性失效，进而导致第二弹性支撑件900支撑失效以及振动传递失效。
可以理解的，第二弹性支撑件900的分布面积以及支撑刚度均可不等设置，本实施例不进行限制。
考虑到振动传递损耗，越靠近激励器400的位置，振动强度越大，越远离激励器400的位置，振动强度逐渐减小，在一些实施例中，单个第二弹性支撑件900的硬度和单个第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积的至少一者，从靠近激励器本体410的一侧到远离激励器本体410的一侧逐渐减小。也就是说，越靠近激励器本体410的位置处，光学膜组件230所需的支撑强度越大，越远离激励器本体410的位置处，光学膜组件230所需的支撑强度越小。相应的，还可以使得第二弹性支撑件900的硬度、横截面积中的至少一者不等设置。
当不同第二弹性支撑件900的硬度不等设置时，越靠近激励器本体410的第二弹性支撑件900的硬度越大，越远离激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的硬度越小。也就是说，越靠近激励器本体410的位置，第二弹性支撑件900抵抗变形的能力越强，这样，第二弹性支撑件900可有效支撑在背光板210与扩散膜222之间，第二弹性支撑件900具有较好的支撑效果和振动传递效果。
当不同第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积不等设置时，越靠近激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积越大，越远离激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积越小。也 就是说，越靠近激励器本体410的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的横截面尺寸越大，其越不容易发生伸缩变形，这样，第二弹性支撑件900可有效支撑在背光板210与扩散膜222之间，第二弹性支撑件900具有较好的支撑效果和振动传递效果。
可以理解的，第二弹性支撑件900的硬度以及横截面积可均不等设置，本实施例不进行限制。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下沿显示面板100垂向的高度、第二弹性支撑件900的分布密度、单个第二弹性支撑件900的刚度、单个第二弹性支撑件900的硬度、单个第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积中的至少一者，从靠近激励器本体410的一侧到远离激励器本体410的一侧逐渐减小，以适应不同的组装工艺需求、制作成本等。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图5以及图8至图25，显示设备10还可以包括第二弹性支撑件900，第二弹性支撑件900的材质可以为硅胶或橡胶等，第二弹性支撑件900的个数为多个，多个第二弹性支撑件900间隔设置。
其中，第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板210连接，另一端与扩散膜222连接。其中，第二弹性支撑件900可以通过粘接件，例如UV胶与背光板210粘接固定，避免第二弹性支撑件900相对背光板210移动。
在一些实施例中，当填充凸起901的凸起高度与气体层M的间隙相同时，填充凸起901的两端可与背光板板体211、扩散膜222固定连接，此时，填充凸起901可演化为第二弹性支撑件900。
在一些实施例中，显示设备可同时设置填充凸起901与第二弹性支撑件900。
通过在背光板210与扩散膜222之间设置第二弹性支撑件900，如第二弹性支撑件900弹性抵压在背光板210与光学膜组件220之间，可以将光学膜组件220与背光板210连接为一个整体，即可以等效为一个单层屏，以有效传递振动，振动传递效率较高，避免因气体层M间隙过大，导致光学膜组件220与背光板210之间出现相对移动。
且由于光学膜组件220会转换并均匀化光源212生成的光线，即使在背光板板体211的设置光源212的一侧设置第二弹性支撑件900，也不会在显示面板100上生成阴影，可以让显示面板100具有较为均匀的亮度。这样，可以不对填充凸起901的形状、尺寸以及第二弹性支撑件900的形状、第二弹性支撑件900与扩散膜222的接触面积等进行限制。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的截面(该斜面与显示设备垂直)形状可以为矩形(如图5所示)、锥形(如图9和图10所示)、梯形、哑铃形(如图11所示)、柱状或其他形状等。
示例性的，第二弹性支撑件900可以为圆锥状结构或四棱柱锥状结构，且第二弹性支撑件900的横截面尺寸从背光板板体211的一端到扩散膜222的一端可以逐渐减小，光源212发射出的光束与第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面相邻，即第二弹性支撑件900未设置在光源212的射出的光线的路径上，这样，可使得显示屏的亮度分布较为均匀。
在一些实施例中，考虑到显示设备的尺寸较大，显示设备组装过程中，背光板板体211或扩散膜222可能会发生变形，即在显示设备不同位置处，背光板板体211与扩散膜222之间的间隙不同，通过在背光板板体211与扩散膜222之间设置多个第二弹性支撑件900，可以使得背光板板体211与扩散膜222之间的间隙维持的预设范围内，避免出现光源212与扩散膜222在某一位置出现相互接触的状况。
背板300设置在背光模组200的背离显示面板100的一侧，即背板300设置在背光板210的后侧，用于支撑背光模组200与显示面板100。背板300的材质可以为铝合金、钢等，以提供有效的支撑。
显示设备10还包括后壳500，位于背板300的背离显示面板100的一侧，即后壳500设置在背板300的后侧，显示设备10的控制器、电连接线等可以设置在背板300与后壳500之间，以简化显示设备10的外观。后壳500的材质可以为塑料、金属等。
激励器400设置在背光板210的背离显示面板100的一侧，激励器400用于驱动背光 板210振动。激励器400为电磁激励器、磁致伸缩激励器和压电激励器中的任意一种或多种，适用性较高。在一些实施例中，激励器400还可以包括磁场生成单元(例如磁铁)和振动线圈，磁场生成单元用于生成磁场，通过在振动线圈中输入不断变化的电流，使得振动线圈在磁场生成单元生成的磁场中的作用力不断变化，从而产生振动。
在一些实施例中，激励器400包括激励器本体410和致动件420，且致动件420与背光板板体211连接，激励器400启动时，致动件420振动并用于带动背光板板体211振动，激励器本体410可随背光板210振动，并经由气体层M将背光板板体211的振动传递至显示面板100，以带动显示面板100振动发声。根据激励器本体410的种类不同，致动件420也具有不同的结构，本实施例不对激励器本体410的种类进行限制。
其中，密闭的气体层M可以等效为阻尼弹簧，致动件420带动背光板板体211振动后，背光板210的振动可以经由气体层M传递至显示面板100，并带动显示面板100振动发声，即实现带动液晶显示设备的显示面板100振动发声。也就是说，本实施例提供的显示设备10可以实现前侧发声，且声像位置与画面中心位置近似重合，实现音画合一，用户的视听效果较好。并且，由于激励器400位于背光板210的背向显示面板100的表面，激励器400的设置并不影响显示设备的显示效果。
其中，根据光学膜组件220与液晶屏之间的固定方式，光学膜组件220可以具有不同的振动形式。例如，当光学膜组件220与液晶屏通过粘接件贴装固定时，荧光膜221固件可与液晶屏同步振动。
当光学膜组件220于液晶屏相互压合时，光学膜组件220与液晶屏之间可以具有间隙，光学膜组件220可以与液晶屏不同步振动，例如光学膜组件220可处于静止状态。
可以理解的，由于气体层M密闭，背光板210振动幅度较大时，气体层M内的气体受压压缩，且气体压力较大，这样，容易导致液晶层内的液晶受压变形，进而导致显示设备10出现显示问题。
为避免液晶层内的液晶受压变形，可以降低激励器400的振动能量或者增大气体层M的间隙。
为避免液晶层内的液晶受压变形，在一些实施例中，本实施例提供一种显示设备，其中，气体层M与大气导通，即气体层M为非密封状态，且显示面板的边缘与背光板板体的边缘的连接位置处具有导气通道811，即扩散膜222与显示面板100的粘接结构形成连通气体层M内外两侧的导气通道811。
请参阅图30至图32，该导气通道811具有等效长度Y和等效内径D，且等效长度Y大于或等于等效内径D的3倍，这样，该导气通道811可等效为具有顺性的弹性结构件。
由于弹性结构件具有高频滤波且低频传递的作用，这样，激励器400带动背光板210低频振动时，低频声波可经由导气通道811传播至气体层M的外侧，此时，气体层M与大气之间具有气体交换，也就避免了因低频振动时振幅较大，导致液晶层受到较大的气体压力。激励器400带动背光板210高频振动时，导气通道811等效为密闭通道，气体层M与大气之间无气体交换，声波不能经由导气通道811传播至气体层M的外侧，然而，由于背光板210高频振动时的振动幅度较小，不会导致液晶层的液晶受压变形。
也就是说，通过设置连通气体层M与大气的滤波结构，既能实现带动显示面板100振动发声，又能避免液晶层内的液晶受压变形。
在一些实施例中，以扩散膜222与显示面板100通过双面胶粘接固定为例进行说明，请参阅图31，双面胶包括多个胶条812，胶条812沿显示设备10侧边的长度方向延伸，且多个胶条812沿显示设备侧边的长度方向间隔设置。为形成导气通道811，多个胶条812具有沿自身的垂向呈多列布置(例如图31中的两列)，且沿胶条812的垂向，相邻两个胶条812的端部错开设置。导气通道811的等效长度Y和等效内径D如图31所示，导气通道811的结构较为简单。
为避免外界的灰尘等异物经由导气通道811进入气体层M内，相邻两列胶条812之间 设有可透气的过滤件813，过滤件813可以为海绵或由纤维编制而成的过滤网等，过滤件813可通过胶条812进行固定。
可以理解的是，气体层M内的气体可以具有较好的密闭效果，也可以是呈不完全密封的状态，例如在一些实施方式中，显示面板100的边缘与背光板210的边缘密封连接，从而形成密闭的气体层M；而在另一些实施方式中，显示面板100和背光板210之间并没有密封，从而让气体层M可以通过部件之间的装配间隙等结构和外界空气连通；在又一些实施方式中，显示面板100和背光板210之间的侧方间隙中还可以设置特定的连通通道，以使气体层M与外界空气连通的同时，对气体层M传递的振动具有一定的滤波效果。只要气体层M能够正常传递激励器400的振动力，使得显示面板100正常振动发声即可，此处对气体层M的密封状态不加以限制。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图15，第二弹性支撑件900的一端可设置容置光源212的容置腔，以罩设在光源212的外侧，另一端与扩散膜222相连。此时，第二弹性支撑件900的材质可以为易于导光的硅胶材质，硅胶材质的硬度较小。第二弹性支撑件900可通过粘接、卡接等方式与背光板板体211相连，或者通过粘接方式与光源212的封装材料相连。为便于光源212的光线进行散射，第二弹性支撑件900的内部可填充气泡、有机硅等，以均匀光线。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的横截面尺寸可由光源212的一端到扩散膜222的一端逐渐变大，即第二弹性支撑件900近似为倒锥形。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面还可以外凸设置，以使光源212发射出的光线在第二弹性支撑件900内形成全反射。在一些实施例中，还可以在第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面上涂覆光学材料，例如第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面上包覆弹性硅胶层，以使光源212发射出的光线在第二弹性支撑件900内形成全反射或者只有部分光线经由第二弹性支撑件900的侧壁面射出，例如小于20％的光线。
这样，通过第二弹性支撑件900的形状设计或者第二弹性支撑件900的涂层设计，可以使相邻的光源212在扩散膜222形成的照明区域交差面积较小，减少不同光源212之间的背光影响，也就是减少不同控光区域之间的相互影响，例如在局部背光调节(local dimming)的显示情况下，显示设备10的亮暗对比度较好。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900可通过负压吸附、粘接、卡接、焊接等方式与背光板210相连。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的两端可以通过抵接、粘接、卡接、负压吸附中的任意两种方式进行固定。例如第二弹性支撑件900的两端分别与背光板210、扩散膜222粘接固定(未示出)，或者第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板210卡接固定，另一端与扩散膜222粘接固定(未示出)，使得稳定性较高。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板210粘接固定或卡接固定，另一端与扩散膜222相互抵接或吸附固定，组装较为方便且易于拆装检修。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的至少部分结构为透明的导光部，示例性的，导光部由导光胶构成，导光部对光线的吸收量较低，透光率较高，且导光胶的硬度较小，可以对光学膜组件230构成较好的缓冲，导光部被配置为将光源212发出的光向显示面板100传导，这样，导光部可将射入其内部的第一光线L1(如图16中带空心箭头的折线所示)朝向显示面板100的一侧射出，即使在背光板210的出光侧设置第二弹性支撑件900，也可以将更多的第一光线L1传导至显示面板100的一侧，光线的损失量较低。也就是说，当某一个光源212处对应设置第二弹性支撑件900时，该光源212生成的至少部分光线构成第一光线L1并经由对应的第二弹性支撑件900射出。
此时，第二弹性支撑件900可设置在背光板210的任意位置处，例如第二弹性支撑件900还可以设置在相邻的两个光源212之间。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图15和图16，第二弹性支撑件900包裹于光源212的外侧， 且导光部位于光源212和显示面板100之间。即第二弹性支撑件900的一端罩设在光源212的外侧，另一端与光学膜组件230连接，既可以对光学膜组件230构成支撑，又可以对光源212构成防护。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的横截面尺寸可由光源212的一端到扩散膜222的一端逐渐变大，即第二弹性支撑件900近似为倒锥形。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面还可以外凸设置，以将光源212射入第二弹性支撑件900内部的第一光线L1在第二弹性支撑件900内形成全反射(如图16所示)。在一些实施例中，还可以在第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面上涂覆光学材料，例如第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面上包覆弹性硅胶层，以使光源212发射出的光线在第二弹性支撑件900内形成全反射或者只有部分光线经由第二弹性支撑件900的侧壁面射出，例如小于20％的光线。
这样，通过第二弹性支撑件900的形状设计或者第二弹性支撑件900的涂层设计，可以使相邻的光源212在扩散膜222形成的照明区域交差面积较小，减少不同光源212之间的背光影响，也就是减少不同控光区域之间的相互影响，例如在局部背光调节(local dimming)的显示情况下，显示设备10的亮暗对比度较好。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900为弹性塑胶件，成本较低。此时，第二弹性支撑件900设置在相邻的光源212之间。
其中，多个第二弹性支撑件900包括至少两个振动传递件组，各振动传递件组中的第二弹性支撑件900围设在对应的激励器400外侧，也就是说，每个激励器400的外侧均设置有一组振动传递件组，振动传递件组包括多个第二弹性支撑件900，这样，每个激励器400对应位置处的光学膜组件230均可以得到较好的支撑，且各个激励器400位置处的传递效率较高。
在一些实施例中，每个光源均对应设置一个第二弹性支撑件900，相邻两个第二弹性支撑件900的大端相互接触。
其中，第二弹性支撑件900还可以与背光板210的背光板板体211相连，且与光源212相互独立。或者，部分第二弹性支撑件900可罩设在光源212外，部分第二弹性支撑件900与背光板板体211相连。以下实施例以第二弹性支撑件900与背光板板体211相连为例进行说明。
在一些实施例中，当显示设备设置第二弹性支撑件900时，为提高振动传递效率，避免第二弹性支撑件900与扩散膜222之间或者扩散膜222与背光板板体211发生碰撞，如图8中的图a至图c所示，第二弹性支撑件900可夹设在扩散膜222与背光板板体211之间，即常态下，第二弹性支撑件900处于压缩状态(请参阅图8中的图b)，且激励器400带动背光板210往复振动时，第二弹性支撑件900相应的进行伸缩，且不会与扩散膜222或背光板板体211相互分离，以避免振动传递失效。即激励器400带动背光板210朝向远离扩散膜222的一侧移动时，第二弹性支撑件900伸长，此时，第二弹性支撑件900可处于自然状态(请参阅图8中的图a)或处于压缩状态。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下的高度大于气体层M的间隙且小于致动件420的振幅与气体层M间隙的和，例如第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下的高度可以为致动件420的振幅的一半与气体层M间隙的和。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的横截面形状可以为圆形、椭圆形、方形或其他任意形状。第二弹性支撑件900的形状可根据其固定方式等进行确定，本实施例不进行限定，适用性较强。
其中，第二弹性支撑件900可通过弹性变形的方式抵压在背光板210与光学膜组件230之间，即第二弹性支撑件900与背光板210之间以及第二弹性支撑件900与扩散膜222之间均未相对固定，固定方式较为简单。
在一些实施例中，还可以对第二弹性支撑件900进行固定。其中，可以对第二弹性支撑件900的至少一端进行固定。当对第二弹性支撑件900的其中一端进行固定时，可以将 第二弹性支撑件900与扩散膜222进行固定，此时，第二弹性支撑件900的另一端与背光板板体211相抵接。或者可以将第二弹性支撑件900与背光板板体211进行固定，此时，第二弹性支撑件900的另一端与扩散膜222相互抵接。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900可以通过粘接(如图8所示)、卡接(如图9和图10所示)、负压吸附(如图11所示)等方式进行固定。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900通过粘接方式进行固定时，可以通过双面胶、粘接液体等粘接固定。示例性的，第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板板体211粘接固定，另一端与扩散膜222相互抵接(如图8所示)。
考虑到第二弹性支撑件900通过粘接方式进行固定时有脱落的风险，且组装效率较低，在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900还可以通过卡接方式进行固定，考虑到扩散膜222的完整性，此时，可以在背光板板体211上设置卡接孔2111(如图9和图10所示)，第二弹性支撑件900的端部伸入卡接孔2111内并与卡接孔2111卡接。其中，卡接孔2111的形状可与第二弹性支撑件900的端部形状相适配。
在一些实施例中，当第二弹性支撑件900的截面形状为矩形时，可以通过与卡接孔2111过盈配合实现固定。当第二弹性支撑件900的截面形状为锥形或梯形时，卡接孔2111可以为锥形孔或阶梯孔(如图10所示)，且卡接孔2111的孔径从背离扩散膜222的一端到靠近扩散膜222的一端逐渐减小。
其中，卡接孔2111的轴线可以与背光板板体211垂直。在一些实施例中，卡接孔2111的轴线还可以倾斜设置(未示出)，即卡接孔2111的轴线与背光板板体211的垂线之间具有夹角。此时，可不限制卡接孔2111的形状。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900可以为两段式弯折结构，其中一段伸入倾斜的卡接孔2111内，并与卡接孔2111卡接，另一端沿显示设备的垂向朝向扩散膜222伸出。
在一些实施例中，为实现第二弹性支撑件900与背光板板体211的卡接，还可以在背光板板体211上铺设固定片2112(如图9所示)，固定片2112可以为金属件或塑料件，例如固定片2112为铝片，铝片与卡接孔2111对应的位置处开设通孔，第二弹性支撑件900的一端伸入卡接孔2111内，另一端经由固定片2112上的通孔朝向扩扩散版222伸出。其中，固定片2112上的通孔尺寸小于卡接孔2111的尺寸。
当背光板板体211上设置卡接孔2111时，卡接孔2111的凹陷深度可以小于背光板板体211的厚度。在一些实施例中，卡接孔2111还可以贯穿背光板板体211。
考虑到第二弹性支撑件900通过粘接方式进行固定时有脱落的风险，且组装效率较低，第二弹性支撑件900还可以通过负压吸附的方式进行固定，例如第二弹性支撑件900的两端分别与背光板板体211和扩散膜222吸附固定(如图11所示)。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的端部设有凹陷部(未示出)，本实施例不对凹陷部的凹陷深度、凹陷部的内壁面形状等进行限制，例如凹陷部的内壁面可以为球面。使用时，通过将凹陷部的内壁面贴装在背光板板体211或扩散膜222上实现吸附固定。
可以理解的，凹陷部的内壁面与背光板板体211或扩散膜222吸附固定时，第二弹性支撑件900的端部相应的发生变形。在一些实施例中，为便于实现第二弹性支撑件900的端部变形，第二弹性支撑件900的端部尺寸较大(如图11所示)，即当第二弹性支撑件900的两端均通过负压吸附的方式进行固定时，第二弹性支撑件900的截面形状可以呈哑铃形。
在一些实施例中，当卡接孔2111的凹陷深度可以小于背光板板体211的厚度时，第二弹性支撑件900的端部与卡接孔2111的底壁吸附固定。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的两端可以通过抵接、粘接、卡接、负压吸附中的任意两种方式进行固定。例如第二弹性支撑件900的两端分别与背光板板体211、扩散膜222粘接固定(未示出)，或者第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板板体211卡接固定，另一端与扩散膜222粘接固定(未示出)，固定稳定性较高。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板板体211粘接固定或卡接固定，另一端与扩散膜222相互抵接 或吸附固定，组装较为方便且易于拆装检修。
第二弹性支撑件900的个数为多个，在一些实施例中，为提高显示设备的组装效率，多个第二弹性支撑件900还可以通过第一连接件902连接为一个整体(如图20所示)，其中，第一连接件902也可以为硅胶、橡胶等弹性材料制成的元件，这样，第二弹性支撑件900与第一连接件902可一体成型。其中，多个第二弹性支撑件900可按照预设的排布形式进行排布，例如多个第二弹性支撑件900按照多行多列的形式间隔排布。
由于背光板210的个数为多个，那么激励器400带动背光板210振动过程中，相邻的两个背光板210之间可能会发生碰撞并生成杂音。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900可以设置在任意相邻的两个背光板210之间的缝隙内(如图20至图22所示)，以使相邻的两个背光板210之间形成缓冲。例如，第二弹性支撑件900可设置在任意相邻的四个背光板210的角部位置处，这样，能够以较少数量的第二弹性支撑件900对背光板210构成缓冲。
可以理解的，本实施例不对第二弹性支撑件900以及第一连接件902的设置位置进行限定。其中，第二弹性支撑件900可单独设置在背光板210上，或者第二弹性支撑件900可单独设置在相邻两个背光板210之间，或者第二弹性支撑件900可设置在任意相邻的四个背光板210的位置处(如图21所示)，在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900还可以同时在背光板210以及相邻两个背光板210之间的缝隙内(如图3所示)，这样，能够以较少数量的第二弹性支撑件900对背光板210构成缓冲。
在一些实施例中，当相邻两个第二弹性支撑件900通过第一连接件902相连时，第一连接件902也同时设置在相邻的两个背光板210之间的缝隙位置处(如图20所示)。
可以理解的，本实施例不对第二弹性支撑件900以及第一连接件902的设置位置进行限定。即第二弹性支撑件900可单独设置在背光板210上、第二弹性支撑件900也可与第一连接件902连接为一个整体后设置在背光板210上、第二弹性支撑件900可单独设置在相邻两个背光板210之间(如图21所示)、第二弹性支撑件900也可与第一连接件902连接为一个整体后设置在相邻两个背光板210之间。在一些实施例中，还可以同时在背光板210以及相邻两个背光板210之间设置第二弹性支撑件900(如图22所示)。
多个第二弹性支撑件900可按照任意方向进行排布，例如多个第二弹性支撑件900以激励器400为中心呈辐射状排布(如图23A所示)，由此保证对背光板210各个位置的均匀、可靠的支撑。考虑到越靠近激励器400的位置，背光板210的振动幅度越大，越远离激励器400的位置，背光板210的振动幅度逐渐减小，在一些实施例中，多个第二弹性支撑件900还可以非均匀排布，且多个第二弹性支撑件900的排布密度在越靠近激励器400的位置处越大(如图23A所示)，也就是说，在越靠近激励器400的位置处第二弹性支撑件900的排布个数越多，在越远离激励器400的位置处第二弹性支撑件900的排布个数越少，这样，可降低第二弹性支撑件900的个数，且能够使背光板210的不同位置均具有较为均匀的振动幅度，提高振动传递效率。
其中，不同第二弹性支撑件900的硬度可以相同。考虑到背光板210不同位置处的振动幅度不同，在一些实施例中，不同位置处的第二弹性支撑件900的硬度还可以不同，即在越靠近激励器400的位置处第二弹性支撑件900的硬度越大，在越远离激励器400的位置处第二弹性支撑件900的硬度越小。这样，能够使背光板210的不同位置均具有较为均匀的振动幅度，提高振动传递效率。
当第二弹性支撑件900夹设在扩散膜222与背光板板体211之间时，不同第二弹性支撑件900的高度可以相同。考虑到背光板210不同位置处的振动幅度不同，在一些实施例中，不同位置处的第二弹性支撑件900的高度可以不同，即在越靠近激励器400的位置处第二弹性支撑件900的高度越大，其自然状态下压缩量较大，在越远离激励器400的位置处第二弹性支撑件900的高度越小，其自然状态下的压缩量较小。这样，能够使背光板210的不同位置均具有较为均匀的振动幅度，提高振动传递效率。
在一些实施例中，以扩散膜220与显示面板100通过双面胶粘接固定为例进行说明，双面胶包括多个胶条，胶条沿显示设备10侧边的长度方向延伸，且多个胶条沿显示设备侧边的长度方向间隔设置。
图23B为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的第一种排布示意图。
示例性的，如图23B所示，多个第二弹性支撑件900围绕激励器400排布，即多个振动传递组件环绕激励器400进行设置，多个第二弹性支撑件900的排布形状可为圆环状(如图3所示)、方形环状(未示出)等，以多个第二弹性支撑件900呈圆环状排布为例，激励器本体410的外侧可排布有多个环状结构，每个环状结构中排布的第二弹性支撑件900的个数以及圆环的个数均可以根据需要进行设置。
其中，呈环状结构排列的多个第二弹性支撑件900的分布中心可与激励器本体410的中心错开设置(未示出)。在一些实施例中，多个第二弹性支撑件900以激励器本体410为中心呈放射状排布，即多列第二弹性支撑件900以激励器本体410为中心圆周对称排布，排布形状较为简单，组装难度和组装成本较低。
在此种设置方式下，第二弹性支撑件900产生的支撑力位于不同的方位，因而可以对背光板210的各个位置进行支撑，达到可靠、均匀的支撑效果。
可选的，如图23B所示，多个第二弹性支撑件900呈放射状排列于激励器400的周向外侧。
在一种可选的实施方式中，多个第二弹性支撑件900之间的排布间距随第二弹性支撑件900和激励器400之间的距离增大而增大；和/或，各个第二弹性支撑件900对显示面板100的支撑强度随第二弹性支撑件900和激励器400的距离增大而减小。
可以理解的是，本实施方式包括三种调节第二弹性支撑件的振动强度的方式：
如图23B所示，第一种方式是通过调整第二弹性支撑件900之间的排布间距，即调整第二弹性支撑件900在激励器400周围的排布密度调节背光板210不同位置的支撑强度，在越靠近激励器400的位置，单位面积区域内第二弹性支撑件900的排布数量越多，即不同第二弹性支撑件900之间的间隔距离越小，而越远离激励器400的位置，单位面积区域内第二弹性支撑件900的排布数量越少，即不同第二弹性支撑件900之间的间距离越大。如此设置，一方面根据背光板210振动幅度的大小不同调整振动传递组件的支撑强度，在不同位置适量设置第二弹性支撑件900，能够简化第二弹性支撑件900的设置工艺，提升生产效率，另一方面，也能够使得背光板210在不同的位置均具有较为均匀的振动幅度，提高振动传递效率。
图23C为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的第二种排布示意图。
如图23C所示，第二种方式是通过每个第二弹性支撑件900本身的支撑强度的变化来调节对背光板210的不同位置的支撑强度，即越靠近激励器400的区域，每个第二弹性支撑件900本身的支撑强度越大，越远离激励器400的区域，每个第二弹性支撑件900本身的支撑强度越小，由此根据背光板210不同区域振动幅度的大小实现支撑强度的调节。需要说明的是，第二弹性支撑件900本身支撑强度的变化取决于第二弹性支撑件的硬度、高度等参数，由此使背光板210不同位置具有较为均匀的振动幅度，提高振动传递效率。在图23C中，不同的填充图案代表不同硬度的第二弹性支撑件900，由内圈向外圈，第二弹性支撑件900的填充越来稀疏，代表第二弹性支撑件900的硬度越来越小。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900对显示面板的支撑强度随第二弹性支撑件和激励器之间的距离增大而增大。
第三种方式是通过上述两种方式结合实现对背光板210的不同位置的支撑强度的调节。第二弹性支撑件900的数量和本身支撑强度的综合考虑，能够进一步减少第二弹性支撑件900的设置数量，使得整个振动传递组件的结构更加简化，降低工艺难度。
对于上述第二弹性支撑件900本身支撑强度的调节方式，示例性的，可以使各个第二弹性支撑件900满足如下至少一个条件：
第一种是使第二弹性支撑件900在平行于显示面板100方向上的横截面积随第二弹性支撑件900和激励器400的距离增大而减小，即通过调节第二弹性支撑件900在径向的大小改变第二弹性支撑件900的支撑强度，越靠近激励器400的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积越大，越远离激励器400的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的横截面积逐渐减小。
第二种是第二弹性支撑件900的刚度随第二弹性支撑件900和激励器400之间的距离增大而减小。第二弹性支撑件900的刚度由第二弹性支撑件900本身的材质决定，越靠近激励器400，第二弹性支撑件900的刚度越大，越远离激励器400，第二弹性支撑件900的刚度越小，由此调节第二弹性支撑件900的支撑强度。
第三种是将第二弹性支撑件900过盈连接在背光板210和显示面板100之间，且第二弹性支撑件900和背光板210之间在垂直于背光板210方向上的过盈量随第二弹性支撑件900和激励器400的距离增大而减小。可以理解的是，第二弹性支撑件900的过盈量越大，则第二弹性支撑件900对背光板210的支撑强度越大，第二弹性支撑件900的过盈量越小，则第二弹性支撑件900对背光板210的支撑强度越小，从而实现对背光板210不同位置支撑强度的调节。过盈量随第二弹性支撑件900和激励器400的距离增大而减小，即越靠近激励器400的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的支撑强度越大，越远离激励器400的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的支撑强度越小。
在一种可选的实施方式中，上述过盈量也可以通过第二弹性支撑件900的高度调节。第二弹性支撑件900在自然状态下沿垂直于背光板210方向的高度，从靠近激励器400的一侧到远离激励器400的一侧逐渐减小，即在越靠近激励器400的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的高度越大，自然状态下的压缩量越大，在越远离激励器400的位置，第二弹性支撑件900的高度越小，自然状态下的压缩量越小，这样能够使背光板210的不同位置具有较为均匀的振动幅度，提高振动传递效率，提升音效质量。此外，此种设置方式也避免了因远离激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的装配公差导致的靠近激励器400位置的第二弹性支撑件900非过盈配合，以确保靠近激励器400的第二弹性支撑件900的可靠的支撑强度。
当然，上述各种不同的方式可以进行任意组合，示例性的，当多个第二弹性支撑件900均匀排布时，可将不同位置处的第二弹性支撑件900设置为硬度不同。当多个第二弹性支撑件900非均匀排布时，也可以同时将不同位置处的第二弹性支撑件900设置为硬度不同、高度不同。
考虑到显示设备工作时，其内部温度会发生变化，而硅胶、橡胶等材质等会随温度的变化发生老化，导致第二弹性支撑件900的缓冲效果降低、支撑强度变差、振动传递效率变差。在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900还可以为复合结构。请参阅图13和图14，图13中的图a和图14中的图a为第二弹性支撑件900的侧视图，图13中的图b为图13中图a的剖视图，图14中的图b为图14中图a的剖视图，其中，第二弹性支撑件900包括支撑部件910和弹性部件920，支撑部件910为非弹性部件，且其变形对温度不敏感，例如支撑部件910的材质为金属、塑料等，弹性部件920的材质可以为硅胶、橡胶等。这样，第二弹性支撑件900受温度的影响较小，其的支撑强度较为稳定，振动传递效率较高。
其中，弹性部件920可以设置在支撑部件910的两端，两个弹性部分分别与背光板板体211、扩散膜222相连。
在一些实施例中，弹性部件920还可以包覆在支撑部件910的部分外壁面上，弹性部件920与扩散膜222相连，支撑部件910的暴露在弹性部件920的外侧的部分与背光板板体211连接。
其中，当支撑部件910为金属件时，可在背光板板体211上设置金属焊点，髌骨支撑部件910焊接连接，固定稳定性较好，且焊接工艺较为成熟，第二弹性支撑件900与背光板板体211之间的组装效率较高。
在一些实施例中，不同激励器400可分属不同声道，不同声道的激励器400可单独进行振动。那么为降低不同激励器400之间的振动影响，相邻两个激励器之间可通过第二弹性支撑件900和第一连接件902构成的整体进行隔离。为便于描述，第二弹性支撑件900和第一连接件902构成的整体可称为隔离条903，隔离条903设置在相邻的两个激励器400之间。其中，相邻的两个激励器400之间的隔离条903的个数可以为一个或多个(如图28和图29所示)。
在一些实施例中，当相邻的两个激励器400之间的隔离条903的个数为多个时，相邻两个隔离条903上的第二弹性支撑件900可相对设置或错开设置，以逐渐消减振动传递。
本实施例不对声道的个数进行限制，例如图28中的左右两个声道或图29中的左中右三个声道，任意相邻的两个激励器400之间均可以通过隔离条903进行隔离。
在一些实施例中，当相邻两个激励器400通过隔离条903进行隔离时，任意一个激励器400的周向位置处还可以同时设置第二弹性支撑件900。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图15，由于第二弹性支撑件900设置在扩散膜与背光板板体211之间，为避免激励器400振动过程中，光学膜组件220出现磨损，可以在光学膜组件220内设置防磨损件904，防磨损件904可设置在扩散膜222与荧光膜221之间，以使扩散膜222与荧光膜221间隔设置。
在一些实施例中，防磨损件904可为聚对苯二甲酸乙二醇酯(polyethylene glycol terephthalate，PET)，PET上设有可对光线进行折反射的镀层，以对光线进行折射、反射等，即通过对防磨损件904的形状、结构等的设计，实现对防磨损件904所在位置处的光线强度的控制。
这样，可以实现对显示设备10的匀光控光作用，例如，防磨损件904与设置在相邻两个光源212之间，可以避免相邻两个光源212之间的区域亮度较低。在一些实施例中，还可以对显示设备10的预设视角范围内具有预设亮度，例如显示设备10正视35度范围内的亮度较高，而45度以外的范围内的亮度较小。在一些实施例中，还可以形成光学壁垒的作用，即相邻的防磨损件904在扩散膜222前侧形成的照明区域交差面积较小，减少不同防磨损件904之间的背光影响，也就是减少不同控光区域之间的相互影响，例如在局部背光调节(local dimming)的显示情况下，显示设备10的亮暗对比度较好。
可以理解的，为避免光学膜组件220出现磨损，防磨损件904的与扩散膜222以及荧光膜221的接触位置无尖锐的棱角结构，例如防磨损件904的与扩散膜222以及荧光膜221的接触面为平面或弧面。其中，弧面朝向荧光膜221的一侧凸出。这样，防磨损件904可近似构成凸透镜结构，用于对光源212发出的光线进行汇聚，具有收视角的效果，解决了荧光膜221与扩散膜222贴合后视角扩大、亮度减少的问题。
在一些实施例中，防磨损件904可以为多层结构。防磨损件904包括多个依次堆叠的第一光处理层，每个第一光处理层的折射率不等设置。例如，第一光处理层可以为三层：第一层9041、第二层9042和第三层9043。第一层9041、第二层9042和第三层9043之间可以通过OCA(Optically Clear Adhesive)光学胶粘接固定，第一层9041、第二层9042和第三层9043中任一层的厚度可以为1微米-3微米，第一层9041和第二层9042可以为片状，第三层9043具有弧形出光面，第一层9041、第二层9042和第三层9043的折射率不同，例如第一层9041的折射率可以为1.5，第二层9042的折射率为2.2，以使部分光线通过防磨损件904的弧形出光面射出，而部分光线经过防磨损件904多次折反射后以预设角度射出。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图18和图19，防磨损件904还可以包括第二光处理层和光学件9045，第二光处理层可以包括两层OCA光学胶层9044，两层OCA光学胶层9044分别贴装固定在荧光膜221以及扩散膜222上，两层光学胶层之间通过光学件9045间隔设置，用于对射入防磨损件904的第二光线L2(如图18和图19中带空心箭头的折线所示)进行朝向荧光膜221一侧反射，光学件9045的材质为聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯(polymethyl  methacrylate，PMMA)、聚碳酸酯(Polycarbonate，PC)等。
这样，光源212射出的光线经其中一个OCA光学胶层9044射入两个OCA光学胶层9044之间的间隙内，并经由另一个OCA光学胶层9044射出。其中，光学件9045可以对两个OCA光学胶层9044内的第二光线L2进行反射，以使第二光线L2朝向两个OCA光学胶层9044之间的间隙内反射，并经由另一个OCA光学胶层9044射出。也就是说，某一个光源212生成的至少部分光线构成第二光线L2会经由对应的防磨损件904射出，而降低对其他照明区域构成影响，也就是实现上述“光学壁垒”的作用。
在一些实施例中，两个OCA光学胶层9044之间的间隙内还可以设置滤光件9046，其材质可以为PET，用于对光源212射出的大角度光线朝向扩散膜222的一侧进行反射，并经过光学膜组件220处理后再次朝向射出，使得OCA光学胶层9044所在位置处射出的光线的角度较为集中。
在一些实施例中，每个激励器400均可以对应设置一个防磨损件904。在一些实施例中，每个光源212也可以对应设置一个防磨损件904，以使扩散膜222与荧光膜221之间不同位置处的间隔较为均匀，避免出现接触磨损。
可以理解的，显示设备10的低频音的效果与激励器400可推动的空气量大小正相关。由于激励器400可带动显示面板100的整个显示区振动发声，显示面板100的可进行振动部分的面积较大，可以推动较大体积量的空气，显示设备10可以发出较好的低频音。
对于任一平板，在其几何尺寸确定的情况下，其具有无穷多阶的模态频率，平板振动的模态频率公式如下：
其中，a，b为平板的长和宽，ρ为平板的密度，h为平板的厚度，D为平板的弯曲强度。
平板第一阶模态频率f11越小，平板发出的声波频率越低，显示设备10的低频声效果越好。
可以理解的，显示面板100以及背光模组200作为一个整体的平板结构，其重量较大，相当于该平板结构的等效密度ρ较大，由公式(1)可知，ρ增大，第一阶模态频率f11降低，有助于激励器400激发出声效更好的低频音。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图33至图43，致动件420还可以与后壳500相连，例如致动件420与后壳500粘接、螺接或卡接。这样，致动件420振动过程中，可同步带动后壳500振动发声，以提高显示设备10的声音的强度。
在一些实施例中，为提高致动件420与后壳500之间的连接稳定性，致动件420上可以设置贴装部件421，贴装部件421贴装在后壳500上，例如粘接。贴装部件421重量较小，强度较高，其材质可以为金属、塑料等。
考虑到后壳500不同位置处的强度不同、激励器400的安装位置不同等，致动件420带动后壳振动时，后壳500的在致动件420周向的不同位置处的振动幅度会出现差异，示例性的，图33和图34中，激励器400右侧靠近后壳500的边缘位置，那么位于激励器400右侧的后壳500的振动幅度会小于位于激励器400左侧的后壳500的振动幅度。这样，会导致后壳500对致动件420的反作用力方向处于倾斜状态，导致致动件420发生歪斜，致动件420不能沿显示设备10的垂向往复移动，进而导致激励器400发出异常杂音。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图35至图37，激励器400上可设置振动稳定件40a，振动稳定件40a连接激励器本体410和致动件420。振动稳定件40a具有弹性，其可以为弹簧、橡胶件等。在一些实施例中，振动稳定件40a的弹性变形能力还可以通过弯折、减薄等方式实现。例如振动稳定件40a环形片状结构，环形片状结构围设在致动件420的外侧，通 过对环形片状结构进行至少一次弯折，环形片状结构的横截面形状可呈波浪形或锯齿形。
为避免致动件420发生歪斜，振动稳定件40a在致动件420周向的不同位置处的弹性力可不同，例如图35和图36的左侧，振动稳定件40a的弹性力较大，以限制致动件420左侧的振动幅度，这样，致动件420的周向的不同位置处受力较为均衡，并能够沿显示设备10的垂向往复移动。
可以理解的，空气层等效为阻尼弹簧，其对高频音具有一定的过滤效果，也就是说显示面板100发出的声音具有高频损耗。
且激励器400带动后壳500振动过程中，容易导致后壳500在中高频段出现异常振动，导致显示设备10出现杂音。且由于高频音的指向性较强，容易导致声像中心出现偏移混乱。在一些实施例中，请参阅图38至图41，还可以在致动件420与后壳500之间设置弹性滤波件40b，弹性滤波件40b具有弹性，由于高频音的振幅较小，弹性滤波件40b可消耗掉高频振动，即通过设置弹性滤波件40b，可以将致动件420的低频振动传递至后壳500上，并带动后壳500振动发出低频音，同时，可以避免致动件420的高频振动传递至后壳500，且也能避免后壳500的高频振动回传至背板上，导致背板共振，并导致背板上的电器件发生异常振动。
在一些实施例中，弹性滤波件40b可以为弹簧、橡胶件。在一些实施例中，弹性滤波件40b的弹性变形能力还可以通过弯折、减薄等方式实现。例如弹性滤波件40b环形片状结构，环形片状结构围设在致动件420的外侧，通过对环形片状结构进行至少一次弯折，环形片状结构的横截面形状可呈波浪形或锯齿形。
在一些实施例中，致动件420与后壳500在显示设备10的垂向上间隔设置，且致动件420与后壳500通过弹性滤波件40b相连。
在一些实施例中，为减小显示设备10的厚度，后壳500可进行开设安装孔530，上述贴装部件421设置在安装孔530内，贴装部件421与后壳500之间通过弹性滤波件40b相连，致动件420振动时，通过弹性滤波件40b带动后壳500振动发声，这样，可以避免致动件420的高频振动传递至后壳500。可以理解的，此时，弹性滤波件40b也可以起到稳定致动件420的作用，避免致动件420往复移动的过程中发生歪斜。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图42和图43，贴装部件421设置在安装孔530内时，贴装固件还可以通过双面胶等固定在后壳500上，例如安装孔530为台阶孔，贴装固件固定在台阶孔的台阶面上。可以理解的，此时，致动件420的全频段的振动均可以传递至后壳500上。
可以理解的，当致动件420与后壳500之间未相互连接时，激励器400带动显示面板100振动发声时，后壳500也会同时发声振动，由于显示面板100与后壳500面积相当，显示面板100与后壳500之间具有相同的共振频率，这样，后壳500也会生可供用户听到的杂音。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图44至图48，可以在后壳500的最大振动位置(例如共振位置)处设置后壳激励器540，后壳激励器540带动该最大振动位置振动时的振动方向与激励器400带动的该最大振动位置的振动方向相反，以达到减小后壳500振动量，避免后壳500生成杂音的目的。
在一些实施例中，该最大振动位置可通过测试仿真获取，且最大振动位置的个数可以为多个(如图44中图a和图b所示)。
在一些实施例中，可以通过控制信号控制后壳激励器540振动。原理如下：
在某个频率点给后壳激励器540施加一个控制信号，后壳500具有第一振动频率特性；
并在该频率点给激励器400施加该控制信号，后壳500具有第二振动频率特性，通过处理器处理获取第二振动频率特性与第一振动频率特性之间的振动频域传递函数；
测试从激励器400到后壳500振动的延时，并通过第一延时器进行延时处理；
通过第一加和器对各个频率点处的振动频域传递函数进行加和，即得到整个频响范围 内的从激励器400到后壳500的振动传递函数；
通过反向器对该振动传递函数进行反向处理，并施加在后壳激励器540上，以带动后壳激励器540振动。
可以理解的，为了使得后壳500具有较好的平整度和刚度，相关技术中的后壳500'上设有第一加强筋550'(如图46中图a所示)，且第一加强筋550'通常为规则的几何形状，结构较为简单，例如第一加强筋550'的形状为尺寸相同的网格状、圆形、条形等。然而，规则几何形状的第一加强筋550'容易导致后壳500产生固定响度的谐振频率。
为避免后壳500因谐振生成杂音，在一些实施例中，后壳500上设置有不规则几何形状的第二加强筋560(如图46中图b所示)，不规则几何形状的第二加强筋560可以为形状不规则、网格尺寸不规则、延伸方向不规则、凸出高度不规则、宽度不规则等。例如第二加强筋560的形状可以为蜂窝状网格、梯形网格或矩形网格，梯形网格第二加强筋560或矩形网格第二加强筋560内的各个网格可以为尺寸不同或形状不同。延伸方向不规则可以指的是条状的第二加强筋560(如图46中图b的点划线所示)的延伸方向与显示设备的横向或纵向之间具有夹角，或者第二加强筋560呈弯折状，例如波浪形。凸出高度不规则指的是沿第二加强筋560的延伸方向，第二加强筋560的不同位置处的凸出高度不同。
通过设置不规则几何形状的第二加强筋560，可以破坏原有后壳的振动模态，丰富后壳500的振动模态，即后壳500的各个谐振频率较为分散，以降低后壳500共振时的振动幅度，从而达到避免后壳500生成杂音。
可以理解的，后壳500的面积与显示面板100的面积相当，这样，后壳500与显示面板100之间容易发低频共振，导致后壳500生成杂音。
在一些实施例中，可以对后壳500进行分段设置请参阅图47中的图a至图c所示，即后壳包括多个相互连接的子后壳501，多个子后壳501并列设置。例如将后壳500分为两段、三段或更多，相邻子后壳501之间可通过泡棉(如图47中的图b所示)、双面胶等粘接固定。这样，子后壳501的面积较小，且小于显示面板100的面积，其与显示面板100产生共振的概率较低，也就避免了后壳500发生低频共振。
在一些实施例中，多个子后壳501可以沿水平方向排列或者沿竖直方向排列。
其中，每个子后壳501的面积可以相同(如图47所示)，在一些实施例中，每个子后壳501的面积还可以不等设置。
在一些实施例中，可在后壳500的边缘与背板300的接触位置处生成杂音。相应的，为避免后壳500生成杂音，可以减小后壳500的边缘与背板300之间的摩擦，例如在后壳500的边缘与背板300之间设置泡棉等第一弹性缓冲件570(如图48中图a所示)，避免后壳500与背板之间出现刚性接触，或者将后壳500的边缘与背板300之间间隔设置，避免后壳500与背板之间出现接触，此时后壳500的边缘与背板300之间形成缝隙。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图48，显示设备10还设置有遮挡件580，遮挡件580用于遮挡泡棉或者上述间隙，美化显示设备10的外观，同时可以避免异物经由该间隙进入背板300和后壳500之间。遮挡件580围设在显示设备10的周向的外侧，可通过粘接固定。
在一些实施例中，当后壳500的边缘与背板300之间间隔设置时，为减少振动传递，背板300与后壳500的锁紧螺丝的外侧套设有弹性阻尼件590，例如阻尼套管(如图48中图b所示)、泡棉(如图48中图c所示)、弹簧(如图48中图d所示)等。
也就是说，在后壳500上设置后壳激励器540、在后壳500上设置不规则几何形状的第二加强筋560、对后壳500进行分段设置、减小后壳500的边缘与背板300之间的摩擦中的任意一者均可以用于避免后壳500生成杂音。在一些实施例中，还可以使用上述方式中的至少两者，例如在后壳500进行分段设置时，同时在后壳500上设置不规则加强筋。
为提升显示设备10的高频效果，请参阅图56至图59，应当说明的是，为简化示意图，图58和图59中未示出振动片430。
激励器400包括振动片430，振动片430与致动件420连接，这样，振动片430被配 置为在致动件420的带动下推动空气振动发声，即致动件420振动过程中，可同步带动振动片430振动发声。
其中，振动片430可以为背板300或后壳500，即致动件420带动背板300或后壳500振动发声。在一些实施例中，为提升高频效果，振动片430还可以为独立部件。例如，当激励器400为电磁激励器时，振动片430的尺寸可以与电磁激励器的U铁442尺寸相当。
在一些实施例中，振动片430可以为金属片或塑料片，振动片430的厚度可以为0.3mm-3mm。这样，振动片430具有较小的重量和较高的硬度，可以激发出较好的高频音。
也就是说，本申请实施例提供的显示设备10可以通过致动件420同时带动显示面板100以及振动片430发声，且具有较好的声音效果。
通过同时带动振动片430以及显示面板100振动发声，本申请实施例提供的显示设备10可发出50-70Hz的低频音，且可发出2000Hz左右的高频音，显示设备10具有较宽的频率响应。
可以理解的，背板300与后壳500之间具有间隔间隙，后壳500与背板300之间围成出音腔体Q，振动片430位于出音腔体Q内，以对振动片430形成防护。且后壳500与背板300之间还设有出音口P，振动片430推动出音腔体Q内的空气振动发声，振动发出的声波可经由出音口P传播至出音腔体Q的外侧，并与显示面板100发出的声波进行叠加，以对高频部分构成补偿。
为提升显示设备10的高频效果，请参阅图63至图70，还可以在显示设备10的周向设置高频扬声器1000，用于发出高频音，例如在显示设备的天侧、地侧、左侧、右侧分别设置至少一个高频扬声器1000(如图63所示)。其中，高频扬声器1000壳朝向显示设备10的周向的外侧发声，例如天侧的高频扬声器1000朝向显示设备10的上侧发声，地侧的高频扬声器1000朝向下侧发声。在一些实施例中，多个高频扬声器1000对称设置。
其中，高频扬声器1000指的是可以发出高频音的扬声器，其可以为只发出高频音的扬声器，其也可以为全频段扬声器并通过输入高频控制信号控制器发出高频音。如图64所示，可朝向激励器400输入全频段的控制信号，而通过高通滤波器2000朝向高频扬声器1000输入高频控制信号。
考虑到高频音的指向性较强，高频扬声器1000朝向显示设备10周向的外侧发出高频音，会导致显示设备10的声像较虚，无法集中进行定位。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图65和图66，高频扬声器1000上可设置相位塞3000，相位塞3000上设有引导弧面4000，通过设置相位塞3000的角度、相位塞3000的位置、引导弧面4000的形状等，可以通过引导弧面4000将高频扬声器1000发出的至少部分高频声波朝向显示设备10的前侧进行反射，以实现高频扬声器1000朝向显示设备10的前侧发声。
在一些实施例中，反射后的高频声波的传播方向可以与显示设备的垂向具有夹角，或者反射后的高频声波的传播方向与显示设备的垂向平行，本实施例不进行限制。
可以理解的，声波的频率约高，其指向性越强，参考图67，P1为激励器400发出的低频声波的传播方向，P2和P3为高频扬声器1000发出的高频声波的传播区域，且P3的频率高于P2的频率，P2和P3的高频声波经墙面反射后朝向显示设备10的前侧传播。这样，P1、P2、P3不同频率的声波具有不同的延时，不同频率的声波具有不同的声像中心位置。
在一些实施例中，还可以通过激励器400以及高频扬声器1000的控制信号对显示设备10进行声像定位。具体的，如图68所示：
通过滤波器将显示设备10的全频段声波分为N个频段，为便于说明，该滤波器可称为频段滤波器8000，频段滤波器8000为多个，对应各个频段；
通过第二延时器5000对每个频段赋予不同的延时时间，这样，可以调整不同频段的声波到达人耳的时间。这样，将屏幕上的某个位置作为虚拟声像中心位置，以此位置为起 点，就可以计算不同频率的声波到达人耳的路径，并计算各个频段的延时，通过第二加和器6000将各个频段的声波加和后作为控制信号输入高频扬声器1000，人耳听到的声音即为从虚拟声像位置发出。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图69，当显示设备10通过支座9000支撑在桌面等位置处时，支座9000内部可以中空设置，用于设置高频扬声器1000，以发出高频音。此时，支座9000上可以设置供声波传播的出音口。
在一些实施例中，支座9000的侧壁较薄时，支座9000内壁也可以设置激励器用于带动支座9000振动发声，即实现显示设备10向前发声。
在一些实施例中，显示设备10的前侧设有名称标识件，该名称标识件可由金属材质制成，显示设备10上可设置驱动该名称标识件振动发声的发声驱动器7020，发声驱动器7020可以为本领域技术人员熟知的电磁激励器、磁致伸缩激励器等。
以壁挂式显示设备为例，请参阅图70，名称标识件(未示出)与发声驱动器7020之间可设置第二连接件7010，连接为近似为U型，包括位于显示面板前后两侧的振动段和位于显示面板下侧的连接段，其中，两个振动段的共振频率相同，且该共振频率与连接段的共振频率不同，这样，发声驱动器7020可通过带动其中一个振动段振动，并带动另一个振动段共振发生，而连接段用于传递两个振动段之间的振动，而不会与振动段发生共振，这样可以减少显示设备10朝向下侧发出的声波。
在一些实施例中，当第二连接件7010一体成型时，连接段的宽度可以小于振动段的宽度，例如连接段呈哑铃状。在一些实施例中，还可以在连接段上设置加强筋、贴装金属附加件等。在一些实施例中，连接段与振动段的材质不同。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图71和图72，以激励器400为电磁激励器为例，电磁激励器包括音圈和磁性组件440。其中，磁性组件440用于生成磁场，音圈在磁场中沿音圈的轴线方向振动。
具体的，磁性组件440包括本领域技术人员熟知的U铁442和华司443，U铁442呈具有开口的筒状，磁铁设置在U铁442内的底面上，华司443设置在磁铁上，磁铁和华司443与U铁442内壁面之间具有间隙，称为磁气隙，磁性组件440用于在磁气隙中提供一个稳定的磁场。
其中，音圈一端与背光板210连接，音圈与背光板210之间还可以设置连接片，以增加音圈与背光板210之间的连接面积，避免音圈与背光板210之间相互脱离。音圈另一端插接在磁气隙内，音圈通过弹波固定在激励器本体410上。随着磁场变化，音圈受力发生沿自身轴向的往复移动。
也就是说，激励器400为电磁激励器时，音圈构成致动件420，音圈与背光板板体211连接。
为连接音圈与振动片430，激励器400还包括连接杆450，连接杆450沿显示设备10的厚度方向延伸，连接杆450可以为铝杆、塑料杆等，重量较小。磁性组件440设有供连接杆450穿过的通孔441，具体的，通孔441设置在磁铁、U铁442和华司443上，这样，音圈和振动片430分别连接在连接杆450的两端，也就是致动件420和振动片430分别连接在连接杆450的两端，避免振动片430与背光板210振动过程中相互干涉。
可以理解的，连接杆450沿显示设备10的厚度方向延伸，指的是连接杆450的与致动件和振动片430连接的两端分别位于激励器本体的沿显示设备10厚度方向的两侧，而不限制连接杆450杆体的延伸方向。例如当连接杆450穿过U铁442和华司443时，连接杆450可以为直杆，当连接杆450绕过激励器本体的外壁面时，连接杆450可以为弯折杆，本实施例不对连接杆450的形状进行限定。
在一些实施例中，以激励器400为磁致伸缩激励器为例，磁致伸缩激励器其利用磁致伸缩效应带动背光板210振动。其中，磁致伸缩效应指的是磁致伸缩材料在磁场中磁化后，其会沿磁化方向伸长或缩短，本实施例不对磁致伸缩激励器中的各个部件的结构、材质等 进行限定。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图73和图74，激励器本体包括线圈401和伸缩件402，伸缩件402可发生沿线圈401轴向的伸缩变形；致动件420包括相连接的第一移动部403和第二移动部404，第一移动部403与激励器本体相连，第一移动部403位于线圈401的沿自身轴向的端部；第二移动部404与激励器本体相连，且与背光板210相连，第二移动部404位于线圈401的沿自身径向的侧方。即第一移动部403和第二移动部404相连并成类似L型的弯折结构，且第一移动部403可构成弯折结构的其中一个折边，并设置在线圈401的端部，第二移动部404位于另一折边上，并设置在线圈401的径向的侧方。
磁致伸缩激励器还包括磁性件405，线圈401用于根据控制信号生成交变磁场，伸缩件402可在交变磁场以及磁性件405生成的磁场的叠加磁场中发生沿线圈401轴向的伸缩变形。
伸缩件402伸缩时，第一移动部403可在伸缩件402的带动下相对线圈401的端部往复移动，第二移动部404可在第一移动部403的弹性力作用下往复移动，并带动本体振动，其中，第二移动部404的往复移动方向与线圈401的轴向呈夹角设置。
伸缩件402伸长时，第一移动部403可在伸缩件402的抵顶下朝向远离线圈401的一侧移动；伸缩件402收缩时，第一移动部403可在自身弹性力作用下朝向靠近线圈401的一侧移动，以实现伸缩件402在叠加磁场中伸缩时，第一移动部403可以相对线圈401往复移动。类似的，第二移动部404可在第一移动部403或自身弹性力作用下往复移动，以实现带动背光板210振动。
由于第二移动部404位于线圈401的径向的侧方，第二移动部404的往复移动方向与线圈401的轴向呈夹角设置，也就是背光板210的往复移动方向与线圈401的轴向呈夹角设置，激励器400的沿背光板210往复移动方向的尺寸近似为其沿线圈401的径向尺寸，而激励器400的沿线圈401径向的尺寸远小于激励器400的沿线圈401轴向的尺寸，这样，显示设备10沿背光板210往复移动方向的尺寸均较小，符合显示设备10超薄化的发展趋势。
可以理解的，当激励器400为磁致伸缩激励器时，连接杆450可以穿过激励器本体，也可以绕激励器本体的外壁面并延伸至激励器本体的另一侧，本实施例不对连接杆450的结构进行限制。
也就是说，第一移动部403可以实现其与激励器本体的连接端为支撑的往复摆动，其具有固定端和与第二移动部404相连的移动端。
在一些实施例中，第一移动部403固定端与伸缩件402之间具有沿第一移动部403延伸方向的第一间距，第一移动部403移动端与伸缩件402之间具有沿第一移动部403延伸方向的第二间距，第一间距小于第二间距，以有效增加第一移动部403移动端的往复偏移量，并提高背光板210的振动幅度，背光板210发出的声音可以具有较大的声压级以及较低的低频频率。
在一些实施例中，第二移动部404的往复移动方向与伸缩件402的伸缩方向相互垂直。
且第一移动部403和第二移动部404之间通过倾斜的连接部406相连，在一些实施例中，第一连接部406沿线圈401的径向延伸，这样，可以通过第一移动部403与连接部406连接一端的较小移动距离，使得第二移动部404具有较大的振动幅度。
请参阅图3以及图75至图81，考虑到背光板210通常为多个，且背光板210的厚度较小，易发生变形，在一些实施例中，显示设备10还包括加强板600，加强板600的厚度可以为1mm-4mm，例如厚度为2mm，加强板600贴装在背光板板体211的背离显示面板100的一侧，例如，加强板600通过双面胶等粘接件与背光板210粘接固定，激励器400与加强板600相连。这样，多个背光板210与加强板600连接为一个整体，相邻的两个背光板210之间具有紧密的拼接缝。同时，背光板210还可以通过加强板600进行散热。
在一些实施例中，加强板600可以与背板300相连，以对加强板600以及背光板210 进行定位。其中，背板300上设有凸出的定位柱330(如图81所示)，灯板和加强板600上分别设置供定位柱330穿过的定位孔。
在一些实施例中，定位柱330可与背板300一体成型。或者定位柱330为与背板300相连的定位铆钉等。
在一些实施例中，激励器400设置在加强板600背离背光板板体211的一侧，当激励器400启动时，激励器400的振动力依次通过加强板600、背光板板体211、气体层M传递至显示面板100，以使显示面板100振动发声。
示例性的，加强板600可以为蜂窝板或碳纤维板，加强板600芯材的材质包括但不限于纸质、芳纶、金属或其它硬质泡沫材料，加强板600蒙皮材料包括但不限于玻璃纤维、碳纤维、玻璃碳混合纤维、塑料或轻质铝等材料。另外，加强板600也可以作为背光板210的导热和散热板。
激励器400驱动背光板210振动时，背光板210与显示面板100之间形成的气体层M的气压变化敏感度与气体层M的间隙大小有关，即气体层M的间隙越大，则气体层M随气压变化敏感度越低；气体层M的间隙越小，则气体层M随气压变化敏感度越强；且气体层M的间隙越大，传递振动的传递效率则越低，显示面板100的发声效果则越差。
在一些实施例中，发声显示面板100的显示设备中的光源可以采用Mini-LED光源，由于Mini-LED光源尺寸较小，能够有效减小显示面板100与背光板210之间的气体层M的间隙，并利用将激励器振动背光板210的振动力，通过等效的阻尼弹簧(即气体层M)传递到显示面板100发声。
需要说明的是，发声显示面板100的显示设备中的光源包括但不仅限于为Mini-LED光源，也可以采用其它的背光光源，例如还可以采用直下式背光或侧入式背光，但由于直下式的背光或侧入式的背光的光源数量较多，例如，采用100颗左右的光源(例如灯珠)，因此，需要较大的混光距离，例如气体层M的间隙尺寸可以为10mm的距离，这样，可以为直下式的光源或侧入式的光源提供较大的混光距离，但这会导致背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的气体层M的间隙较大，从而导致背光板板体211振动形变引起的气体层M的气压变化敏感度较低，声音传递效率低，显示面板100的发声效果差的问题。
在一些实施例中，显示设备还包括发声组件，该发声组件包括至少一个激励器，该激励器设置在背光板的背离显示面板的一侧。图24A为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板拼接结构示意图；图24B为图24A中显示设备的剖视图；如图24A至图24B所示，背光板210相互拼接且位于光学膜组件背离显示面板100的一侧，背光板210被配置为向显示面板100提供背光光源212。本申请优选采用mini-LED背光板，考虑到显示设备10的尺寸以及背光板210板体制作工艺等因素，显示设备10的尺寸通常大于背光板210的尺寸，即背光板210的个数通常为多个，多个背光板210阵列拼接设置，即显示面板100由多个mini-LED背光板210拼接而成。每个mini-LED背光板210面向显示面板100一侧设置有多个光源212，且多个光源212间隔设置，第二弹性支撑件900位于多个光源212之间的间隙中，通过第二弹性支撑件900将发声组件的振动力传递到显示面板100，由此实现音画合一的同时，同时避免影响光源212发光。
此外，背光模组200还可以包括基板，该基板为蜂窝板或碳纤维板。当LCD屏幕尺寸为65寸且采用铝质蜂窝基板时，蜂窝板厚度为1～4mm。具体地，蜂窝芯材材质可以是纸质、芳纶、金属、或其它硬质泡沫材料。蜂窝板蒙皮材料包括但不限于玻璃纤维、碳纤维、玻璃-碳混合纤维、塑料、轻质铝等。同时，基板也是mini-LED背光板210的导热和散热板。
在一些实施例中，所述基板为矩形平板，基板与背光板210间由双面胶粘贴，基板使相邻的背光板210相互连接，以使所有背光板210连接成一张整板。背光板210与背光板210之间具有紧密的拼缝。
下面将对第二弹性支撑件900的压缩变化过程进行详细说明。
图25为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的静止状态结构示意图；图26为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的压缩状态结构示意图；图27为本申请实施例提供的显示设备的多个背光板上设置的第二弹性支撑件的自由接触状态结构示意图。
第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板210接触，另一端与扩散膜220接触，当静态放置时，如图25所示，第二弹性支撑件900处于过盈压缩状态；当激励器400向靠近显示面板100一侧推动时，如图26所示，第二弹性支撑件900处于进一步过压状态；如图27所示，当激励器400向背离背光板210一侧振动时，第二弹性支撑件900处于自由接触状态。
在其他的一些实施方式中，如图23B至图23C所示，上述激励器400可以设置为至少两个，且至少两个激励器400沿和显示面板100平行的方向间隔设置，多个第二弹性支撑件900包括至少两个振动传递件400组，各振动传递件400组中的第二弹性支撑件900围设在对应的激励器400外侧，这样，能够对激励器400周向的不同位置处的光学膜组件230进行支撑，且激励器400周向不同位置处的振动传递效果较好。
需要说明的是，不同的激励器400可分属不同的声道，不同的声道激励器400可以单独进行振动。对于多个振动件的具体排布方式，可以参考前述各实施例，在此不再赘述。
在一种可选的实施方式中，第二弹性支撑件900可以选择为硅胶件或橡胶件，以保证其具有一定的压缩量。
在一些实施方式中，如图26或图24B所示，发声组件还包括加强板600，加强板600贴合设置于背光板210背离显示面板100的一侧，激励器400设置在加强板600背离背光板210的一侧。发声组件用于驱动背光板210振动发声。具体发声的传递路径为：背光板210与显示面板100之间形成气体层，在气体层内设置多个第二弹性支撑件900，即该第二弹性支撑件900设置于背光板210和显示面板100之间，当激励器400振动时，带动背光板210振动，背光板210会将振动传递至第二弹性支撑件900，第二弹性支撑件900再将振动传递给显示面板100，从而实现显示面板100的自发声，进而实现显示设备10的音画合一，提升用户的感官体验。
可以理解的是，激励器400可以直接固定在背光板210相背于显示面板100的一面，也可以通过先将激励器400设置在加强板600上，然后通过将加强板600与背光板210的贴合固定而实现激励器400的间接固定，如此设置可以方便激励器400的固定，以避免直接固定而对背光板210产生损坏。
值得注意的是，若将背光板210固定在加强板600上，若固定过紧，相邻背光板210之间会存在硬接触，在振动时会产生杂音，因而背光板210的固定精度应当进行一定的限制。可选的，第二弹性支撑件900可以设置在任意相邻的两个背光板210之间的缝隙内，以使相邻的两个背光板210之间形成缓冲。
在一些实施例中，当卡接孔2111贯穿背光板板体211时，部分粘接件暴露在卡接孔2111处，第二弹性支撑件900的端部可通过粘接件与加强板600固定连接。
在一些实施例中，加强板600为夹芯板或碳纤维板，夹芯板可以为蜂窝夹芯板、泡沫夹芯板、木夹芯板和亚克力板中的任一者，成本低易获取。其中，蜂窝夹芯板可以为铝蜂窝夹芯板、芳纶蜂窝夹芯板等，泡沫夹芯板可以为聚氯乙烯(Polyvinyl chloride，PVC)泡沫夹芯板、聚甲基丙烯酰亚胺(PMI)泡沫夹芯板等，木夹芯板可以为巴沙木等轻木。
本领域技术人员熟知，声音的音质可以从音量、频响范围、音色等方面进行衡量。其中，夹芯板发出的声音相较于铝板发出的声音具有较高的音量、以及更宽、起伏更小的音频响应，也就是说通过设置加强板600，显示设备10发出的声音可以具有较好的音质。
具体的，夹芯板包括芯材和蒙皮，蒙皮贴设在芯材的相对的两侧。蒙皮的材质可以为玻璃纤维布、碳纤维布、玻璃-碳混合纤维、铝纸、塑料等。芯材的材质可以为纸、芳纶、金属、或其它硬质泡沫材料。
其中，加强板600的阻尼大于背光板板体211的阻尼，相对于相关技术中的背光板板体211，其密度、质量均较小。
通过设置阻尼较大的加强板600，可以提高背光板210的等效阻尼，降低背光板210的等效密度，提高背光板210的弯曲模量，增加模态谐振频率数量，使传导至显示面板100的频率响应提高，扩大显示面板100发出声音的频率范围，避免显示面板100的音频响应产生明显峰谷和失真而影响听感。
而且，由于加强板600为连续的实体结构，可以减少声波在相邻两个背光板210的缝隙内的反射，避免激发出的声波在缝隙内多次反射而失真。
可以理解的，多个背光板210并列设置在加强板600上，考虑到显示设备10的声学效果，相邻两个背光板210的间隙越小越好，以避免相邻两个背光板210之间的缝隙会造成分割振动，影响声学效果。然而如果相邻两个背光板210之间的缝隙过小，激励器400带动背光板210振动时，相邻两个背光板210之间会发生碰撞，进而生成杂音。因此，需要较为严格的控制相邻两个背光板210之间的间隙，其中，相邻两个背光板210之间的间隙可以为1mm-2mm。
在一些实施例中，为控制相邻两个背光板210之间的间隙大小，可在背光板210和加强板600组装过程中，对背光板210和加强板600通过多个定位件610进行定位(如图76中的图a至图c所示)，相应的，背光板210和加强板600上设有供定位件610穿过的定位孔(未示出)。根据定位件610结构的不同，可采取不同的组装方式。
在一些实施例中，定位件610为SMT(Surface Mounted Technology，表面贴装技术)定位钉时(如图76中的图a所示)，定位件610可通过贴片方式进行组装，或者定位件610可通过粘接、焊接等方式进行固定。组装过程中，定位件610可首先穿设在背光板210的定位孔内，然后将定位件610穿设在加强板600的定位孔内进行预定位，然后将背光板210和加强板600进行贴合，这样，背光板210和加强板600之间的定位精度较高。定位钉的材质可以为金属、塑料等。
在一些实施例中，定位件610为预定位工装(如图76中的图b所示)，通过预定位工装依次穿设在背光板210和加强板600的定位孔内。可以理解的，此时，背光板210和加强板600贴合完成后，需要将预定位工装去除。
在一些实施例中，定位件610还可以与第二弹性支撑件900连接为一个整体(如图76中的图c所示)，这样，安装第二弹性支撑件900时，即可将定位件610穿过背光板210的定位孔，组装难度交底，且背光板210和加强板600贴合完成后不需要去除定位件610，以对背光板210和加强板600构成定位作用。定位件610的材质可以为金属、塑料等。
在一些实施例中，为使得激励器400激发出较为丰富的振动模态，可以将各个背光板210不等面积设置(如图77和图78所示)，例如每个背光板210的板面积均不同，这样，显示设备10发出的声音的音质较好。
然而，考虑到光源212通常由驱动芯片230进行控制，且为降低驱动芯片230的算法难度，每个驱动芯片230可以控制固定数量的光源212(例如9个)，那么，每个背光板210上的光源212的数量可以为该固定数量的倍数(例如9个、18个、27个等)。这样，既能使得各个背光板210不等面积设置，又能简化驱动芯片230的算法。
以图77为例，显示设备10具有四个激励器400，左侧两个激励器400用于形成左声道，右侧两个激励器用于形成右声道。四个激励器400所在的背光板210(其设有54个光源212)的横向长度可与加强板600的长度相同，以便于激发出低频模态。而该四个激励器400上下两侧的多个背光板210则不等面积设置，以分散谐振点，且多个背光板210左右对称排布，不等面积设置的背光板210上分别设有9个光源212和18个光源212。
在一些实施例中，显示设备10可设置多个声道，例如两个声道(如图77所示)、四个声道(如图79所示)等。其中，可通过增加相邻声道中背光板210之间的间隙，该间隙可对振动进行较大的消耗，以避免相邻的声道之间的振动影响，也就是通过降低显示设 备10的低频效果，来提高不同声道之间的定位感。
例如图78中的左声道和右声道之间具有第一间隙C1，图79中的上声道和下声道之间具有第二间隙C2，图79中的左声道和右声道之间具有第三间隙C3，其中，第一间隙C1、第二间隙C2、第三间隙C3的大小可根据需要进行设置。
在一些实施例中，当显示设备10的尺寸较小时，如图80所示，显示设备10可只设置一个背光板210，为对背光板210形成支撑，显示设备10可设置加强板600。在一些实施例中，此时，背光板210还可以通过螺纹紧固件、铆钉等固定在背板300上，以螺纹紧固件为例，为便于背光板210振动，螺纹金属件的外侧还需要包覆第二弹性缓冲件，其中，部分第二弹性缓冲件设置在螺纹紧固件的头部与背光板210之间，部分第二弹性缓冲件设置在背光板210与背板300之间。
在一些实施例中，激励器本体410的周向的外侧可以设置有多个弹性支脚470，弹性支脚470的材质可以为金属、或塑料。如图71和图72所示，弹性支脚470的个数可以为3-5个，激励器本体410通过弹性支脚470与背板300或背光板210相连。
其中，激励器本体410通过橡胶、硅胶等弹性材质件(即，弹性支脚470)与背板300弹性连接时，致动件420振动过程中，激励器本体410可相对背板300进行往复移动，此时，激励器400也构成近似惯性驱动方式带动背光板210振动，避免因激励器本体410与背板300相对固定，影响显示设备10的频率响应。其中，背板300为金属件，其可为激励器本体410提供较好的支撑。
多个弹性支脚470沿激励器本体的周向间隔设置，以使激励器本体与显示面板100之间具有多个连接位置，激励器400的固定稳定性较高。
其中，弹性支脚470凸出激励器本体的外壁面并与背板300或背光板210连接。由于弹性支脚470可以发生弹性变形，激励器本体与背光板210之间可以发生相对移动，即激励器400振动过程中，激励器本体可以相对背光板210振动，以使激励器400构成惯性驱动方式带动显示面板100振动，有助于激发出声效更好的低频音。
其中，弹性支脚470可以沿直线方向延伸(未示出)，结构较为简单，易于成型。在一些实施例中，弹性支脚470还可以沿激励器本体410的周向延伸(如图71所示)，即弹性支脚470呈弧状，这样，弹性支脚470的长度较大，可以具有较大的弹性变形量，激励器本体与背板300或背光板210之间可以具有较大的相对位移量，易于使得激励器400构成惯性驱动方式带动背光板210振动，有助于激发出声效更好的低频音。
可以理解的，弹性支脚470的自由端还可以具有分支结构，以增加其与背板300或背光板210的连接位置，提高连接稳定性。或者弹性支脚470还可以呈波浪弯折状，以使弹性支脚470具有较大的弹性变形量，本实施例不对弹性支脚470的形状、尺寸等进行限制。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图4、图5、图34、图36、图40、图41、图43、图56、图58以及图59，激励器本体410与背光板板体211连接。以电磁激励器为例，U铁442通过弹性支脚470与背光板210相连，弹性支脚470的端部设置有第三弹性缓冲件，第三弹性缓冲件为阻尼块480，例如双面胶、泡棉等。这样，可以允许弹性支脚470与背光板210之间具有较大的相对移动幅度，有助于实现激励器400以惯性驱动方式带动显示面板100振动。
这样，激励器400工作时，音圈可以生成频率较高的振动并带动背光板210振动，通过音圈的反作用力，可以使得激励器本体410以频率较低的振动带动背光板210振动，即激励器本体410随背光板210的振动而振动，激励器400构成惯性驱动方式带动背光板210振动。
由上述公式(1)可知，通过将激励器本体410连接在背光板板体211上，可以理解为背光板板体211附加了一个振动重量，对于显示面板100以及背光板210等效构成的平板结构而言，相当于增大了该平板结构的等效密度，第一阶模态频率f11降低，有助于激发出声效更好的低频音。
可以理解的，当背光板210上设有加强板600时，激励器本体410与加强板600连接，应当说明的是，为简化示意图，图4、图5、图34、图36、图40、图41、图43、图56、图58以及图59中均未示出加强板。
在一些实施例中，请参阅图6、图33、图35、图39、图40、图42以及图57，激励器本体410还可以与背板300相连。在一些实施例中，弹性支脚470通过固定销与背板300相连，固定销可以与背板300垂直，其中，显示设备10还包括第一弹性支撑件460，激励器本体410通过第一弹性支撑件460与背板300连接。
其中，第一弹性支撑件460的材质可以为硅胶、橡胶等，第一弹性支撑件460可以套设在固定销的外侧，第一弹性支撑件460的外壁面上设有与延伸部卡接的卡接凹槽，这样，延伸部的两侧均具有部分第一弹性支撑件460，即第一弹性支撑件460的截面形状可近似为工字型，避免激励器400振动过程中，弹性支脚470与固定销或背板300发生干涉，本实施例不对第一弹性支撑件460的结构、材质等进行限制。
第一弹性支撑件460的弹性力方向与显示设备10的厚度方向平行，以使激励器本体410与背板300之间具有可变的相对位置。也就是说，激励器400振动过程中，激励器本体410可相对背板300进行往复移动，此时，激励器400也构成近似惯性驱动方式带动背光板210振动，避免因激励器本体410与背板300相对固定，影响显示设备10的频率响应。
可以理解的，背光板210的中部位置相对于其边缘位置的变形较大，激励器400固定在背板300上时，因为背光板210的变形，音圈可能会出现受拉或受压的状况，导致音圈偏离磁场的中心。通过设置第一弹性支撑件460，可以对音圈的位置进行调节，即音圈可以通过第一弹性支撑件460进行自适应性调节，避免音圈与U铁442或华司443发生碰撞干涉。
在一些实施例中，激励器400的个数可以为一个或多个，多个激励器400间隔设置。这样，多个激励器400可以构成立体声系统，即不同激励器400可分属不同声道，可以理解的，每个声道可对应一个或多个激励器400，从而提升用户的使用体验。
请参阅图60至图62，为提升显示设备10的高频效果，本实施例可采用多模态高频振动弯曲波叠加的方式。在一些实施例中，显示设备10还包括分隔件700，分隔件700的两端分别连接背板300与后壳500，以将出音腔体Q分隔为多个谐振腔X，这样，每个谐振腔X内的振动片430发出的声波可以在对应谐振腔X内谐振。
其中，每个谐振腔X的谐振频率可以不同，这样，每个谐振腔X可以发出不同频率的声波，显示设备10的高频谐振频率范围较宽，且可以在较宽的频率范围内获得较大的声压级。
为避免相邻两个谐振腔X相互影响，分隔件700可包括隔音材质。在一些实施例中，分隔件700的一端与背板300和后壳500中的一者固定相连，另一端与背板300和后壳500中的另一者间隔设置。例如分隔件700第一端与后壳500一体成型，分隔件700第二端与背板300之间填充有隔音海绵710。
其中，每个谐振腔X内设有至少一个激励器400，也就是每个谐振腔X内对应设置有至少一个振动片430，每个谐振腔X均对应设置有出音口P，出音口P用于将振动片430振动发出的声波导出，以对高频构成补偿。
谐振腔X的形状、尺寸以及激励器400在谐振腔X的设置位置均可以通过模态分析进行确定，本实施例不进行限定。
以如图60为例，多个激励器400沿水平方向间隔设置，分隔件700将出音腔体Q分隔出两个谐振腔X，每个谐振腔X均沿水平方向延伸，两个谐振腔X的出音口P分别位于显示设备10的左侧和右侧，谐振腔X的出音路径长度为L，出音路径长度L为二分之一声波波长的整数倍，例如一倍、两倍或更多，激励器400可设置在任意一个二分之一声波波长的波腹位置处。
在一些实施例中，出音口P可以位于显示设备10的任一侧边位置处，例如左侧、右侧或上侧。出音口P可以朝向显示设备10的前方或侧前方传播高频声波。
在另一些实施例中，请参照图49所示，显示设备10还包括填充层905，通过在背光板板体211与显示面板100之间形成的气体层M内设置填充层905，以减小背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的气体层M的间隙，以提高背光板板体211振动形变引起的气体层M的气压变化的敏感度，从而达到提升显示面板100的发声效果的目的。
在一些实施例中，填充层905铺设在背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧，并与背光板板体211连接。
其中，填充层905可以通过泡棉双面胶、UV胶等粘接在背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧，以通过填充层905减小背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的气体层M的间隙。
当然，填充层905还可以通过卡接、螺纹连接等方式与背光板板体211连接，只要能够实现填充层905与背光板板体211连接即可。
在一些实施例中，如图49所示，填充层905的高度小于背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的气体层M的间隙，以使背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的气体层M的间隙保持稳定，以使激励器400驱动背光板板体211振动，并通过气体层M带动显示面板100振动发声的同时，能够保证背光板板体211的振动形变引起的气体层M气压变化具有较高的敏感度，从而实现提升显示面板100的发声效果的目的。
需要说明的是，填充层905的高度指的是填充层905从背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧向显示面板100一侧延伸的方向的尺寸。
在一些实施例中，填充层905的高度低于光源212的高度，以使填充层905能够避让光源212的直射光照范围，避免填充层905对光源212的直射光照路径造成干扰，影响显示面板100的显示效果。
在一些实施例中，填充层905在背光板板体211上的投影覆盖背光板板体211，例如，填充层905的面积与背光板板体211的面积大小相等，以使填充层905在背光板板体211上的投影与背光板板体211重合。
上述方案中，通过在背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧设置填充层905，并使使填充层905在背光板210上的投影覆盖背光板板体211，这样，填充层905可以为一体结构，从而能够减小填充层905的制作工艺和安装工艺，进而降低制作和安装成本。
在一些实施例中，填充层905上可以设置有安装光源212的通孔，例如，光源212为灯珠时，填充层905上可以通过一体成型的方式在填充层905上设置间隔排布的通孔，以使灯珠放置在通孔中并与背光板板体211连接；或者，光源212为沿横向或纵向布置的灯条结构，也可以通过一体成型工艺在填充层905上设置用于放置灯条且与灯条形状相匹配的通孔，以使灯条放置在通孔中并与背光板板体211连接。
需要说明的是，灯珠或灯条安装在填充层905上的通孔内后，灯珠或灯条均凸出填充层905，以使灯珠或者灯条能够正常发光，且填充层905不对灯珠或灯条的直射光照范围造成干扰即可。
在一些实施例中，可以在气体层M内仅设置填充层905，或者仅设置填充凸起901，通过填充层905或填充凸起901减小气体层M的间隙。
在一些实施例中，请参照图50所示，显示设备10还可以包括多个填充凸起901和填充层905，多个填充凸起901间隔设置在填充层905上，这样，通过填充层905和设置在填充层905上的多个填充凸起901共同减小背光板板体211与显示面板100之间形成的气体层M，以提高背光板板体211振动形变引起的气体层M的气压变化的敏感度，从而达到提升显示面板100的发声效果的目的。
在一些实施例中，填充层905铺设在背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧的表面上，多个填充凸起901设置在填充层905和显示面板100之间，其中，填充凸起901和光 源212均凸出填充层905面向显示面板100的表面。且填充凸起901设置在任意相邻光源212之间，以使填充凸起901能够避让光源212的直射光照范围，从而提升显示面板100的显示效果。
可以理解的是，通过在填充层905上设置填充凸起901，能够进一步减小背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的气体层M的间隙。
在一些实施例中，各填充凸起901可以与填充层905连接，以使其形成为整体结构，以便于安装，降低安装难度，从而降低安装成本。
示例性的，各填充凸起901可以与填充层905可通过注塑等一体成型的工艺形成为一体件，这样，可以简化制作工艺和降低安装难度，从而减小加工成本。
需要说明的是，沿背光本体至显示面板100的延伸方向，设置在填充层905上的填充凸起901的截面尺寸逐渐减小，以形成锥状结构，例如，四棱锥等，以避免填充凸起901对光源212的直射光照范围造成干扰，影响显示面板100的显示效果。
在一些实施例中，设置在填充层905上的填充凸起901间隔设置在任意相邻的光源212之间，例如，填充凸起901设置任意四个相邻光源212之间等，以使各填充凸起901设置在光源212的直射光照区域之外，可以避免填充凸起901阻挡光源212的光照路径，从而避免在显示面板100上形成暗斑等问题，进而提升显示面板100的显示效果。
另外，填充凸起901凸出填充层905的高度可以小于或等于光源212凸出填充层905的高度，以使填充凸起901设置在光源212的直射光照区域之外。
为了减小显示设备10的重量，在本申请实施例中，填充凸起901和填充层905可以选择轻质高密度的材料，例如，可以采用轻质高密度发泡材料，如三聚氰胺材料等。
在另一些实施例中，请参照图51所示，显示设备还可以包括第二弹性支撑件900，第二弹性支撑件900的材质可以为硅胶或橡胶等，第二弹性支撑件900的个数为多个，多个第二弹性支撑件900间隔设置。
其中，第二弹性支撑件900的一端与背光板板体211连接，另一端与显示面板100抵接，以使第二弹性支撑件900支撑在背光板板体211和显示面板100之间，以使气体层M的间隙保持稳定，以避免光源212与显示面板100之间的气体层M因振动形变而导致光源212与显示面板100之间发声碰触而产生杂音，从而能够提升显示面板100的发声效果。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900与背光板板体211固定连接，例如，第二弹性支撑件900可以通过第三粘接件与背光板板体211粘接固定，其中，第三粘接件可以为UV胶、泡棉双面胶等，避免第二弹性支撑件900相对背光板板体211移动，从而提高第二弹性支撑件900的支撑可靠性。
在一些实施例中，第二弹性支撑件900的截面(该斜面与显示设备垂直)形状可以为矩形、锥形、梯形、哑铃形或其他形状等。
示例性的，第二弹性支撑件900可以为圆锥状结构或四棱柱锥状结构，且第二弹性支撑件900的横截面尺寸从背光板板体211的一端到显示面板100的一端可以逐渐减小，光源212发射出的光束与第二弹性支撑件900的外壁面相邻，即第二弹性支撑件900未设置在光源212的射出的光线的路径上，这样，可使得显示屏的亮度分布较为均匀。
在一些实施例中，考虑到显示设备的尺寸较大，显示设备组装过程中，背光板板体211或显示面板100可能会发生变形，即在显示设备不同位置处，背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的间隙不同，通过在背光板板体211与显示面板100之间设置多个第二弹性支撑件900，可以使得背光板板体211与显示面板100之间的间隙维持的预设范围内，避免出现光源212与显示面板100在某一位置出现相互接触的状况。
在一些实施例中，显示面板100与光源212在显示设备10的厚度方向上也可以相互抵接，这样，气体层M的间隙较小，显示设备的厚度较小。此时，光源212可以采用软质封装材料，以避免显示面板100与光源212之间因刚性碰触产生杂音。
在一些实施例中，显示面板100可以与光源212之间还可以间隔设置，以避免显示面 板100与光源212之间发生刚性碰撞产生杂音。
在一些实施例中，填充凸起901凸出背光板板体211朝向显示面板100的一侧延伸，且填充凸起901的高度与气体层M的间隙相同，即填充凸起901的一端与背光板板体211连接，填充凸起901的另一端与显示面板100抵接，如图52所示，这样，填充凸起901可以演化为第二弹性支撑件900，以对背光板板体211和显示面板100进行支撑，以使背光板板体211与显示面板100之间形成的气体层M的间隙能够保持稳定。
可以理解的是，通过将填充凸起901的一端设置为与背光板板体211固定连接，填充凸起901的另一端与显示面板100抵接，以使填充凸起901支撑在背光板板体211和显示面板100之间，填充凸起901除了用于减小气体层M的间隙和用于支撑显示面板100之外，填充凸起901还能够演化为用于传递振动的第二弹性支撑件，以将背光板板体211的振动通过填充凸起901传递至显示面板100，这样，可以提高振动传递效率。
其中，填充凸起901同样可以采用粘接、螺纹连接或者卡接等方式固定在背光板板体211上。
另外，通过将填充凸起901演化为弹出支撑件，这样，可以减少显示设备10中的零部件，从而减少安装工艺步骤，降低工艺成本。
在另一些实施例中，请参照图53所示，气体层M内设置有填充层905和设置在填充层905上的多个填充凸起901，填充凸起901凸出填充层905朝向显示面板100的一侧延伸，且填充层905与填充凸起901的高度和与气体层M的间隙相同，即填充层905铺设在背光板板体211面向显示面板100的一侧上并与其连接，填充凸起901的一端与填充层905固定连接，填充凸起901的另一端与显示面板100抵接，这样，填充层905和填充凸起901共同演化为第二弹性支撑件900，以对背光板板体211和显示面板100进行支撑，以使背光板板体211与显示面板100之间形成的气体层M的间隙能够保持稳定。另外，填充层905和设置在填充层905上的填充凸起901也可以演化为用于传递振动的第二弹性支撑件，以将背光板板体211的振动通过填充凸起901传递至显示面板100，这样，可以提高振动传递效率。
另外，为了减小填充凸起901对光源212直射光照的影响，填充凸起901的表面可以设置有反光层511，示例性的，如图54所示，反光层511覆盖填充凸起901的表面。
可以理解的是，通过在填充凸起901的表面设置覆盖填充凸起901表面的反光层511，以减小填充凸起901对光源212所发光的吸收，从而可以提高显示面板100的显示效果。
示例性的，反光层511可以为漫反射膜层，例如，可以在填充凸起901表面可以通过喷涂、贴敷等工艺附着一层漫反射反光材料的反光层511，从而减小填充凸起901对光的吸收。
需要说明的是，为了减小填充凸起901对光源212所发光吸收造成的影响，在本申请实施例中，无论是气体层M内仅设置填充凸起901，还是气体层M内设置有填充层905和填充凸起901，在填充凸起901的表面上均设置有反光层511，以减小填充凸起901对光源212所发光的吸收，从而可以提高显示面板100的显示效果。
在一些实施例中，请参照图55所示，显示设备可同时设置第二弹性支撑件900、填充凸起901和/或填充层905，例如，当气体层M内设置有多个填充体时，或者气体层M内设置有填充层905和设置在填充层905上的填充凸起901，弹性支撑的一端与背光板板体211连接，第二弹性支撑件900的另一端与显示面板抵接，而填充凸起901面向显示面板的一端可以与显示面板抵接，也可以与显示面板之间具有间隙，即填充凸起901面向显示面板的一端低于第二弹性支撑件900的高度。
当填充凸起901小于第二弹性支撑件900的高度时，填充凸起901只用于减小气体层M的间隙，第二弹性支撑件900用于减小气体层M的间隙的同时主要用于支撑背光板板体211和显示面板；而当填充凸起901的高度与第二弹性支撑件900相等时，即填充凸起901和第二弹性支撑件900均与显示面板抵接，这样，填充凸起901和第二弹性支撑件900 可以共同减小气体层M间隙的同时，还可以共同支撑背光板板体211和显示面板，能够提高对显示面板的支撑可靠性。
或者，气体层M仅设置有填充层905，第二弹性支撑件900凸出填充层905的表面并与显示面板抵接，这样，填充层905用于减小气体层M的间隙，第二弹性支撑件900用于支撑显示面板，以避免显示面板发生形变而导致光源212与显示面板发生触碰。
图82为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图八；图83为本申请一些实施例提供的显示设备的内部结构的剖面示意图九。请参照图82和图83所示，在一些实施例中，激励器400还可以设置为多个，多个激励器400可以在背光板背离显示面板的一侧均匀设置；或者，也可以根据需要非均匀设置。其中，不同激励器400可分属不同的声道，不同声道的激励器400可以单独进行振动。为了降低不同激励器400之间的振动影响，相邻两个激励器400之间可通过声道隔离结构906进行隔离，即将声道隔离结构906设置于不同激励器400所在区域之间，从而提升各声道之间的语音隔离度，降低各声道振动区域之间的振动影响，提升显示设备的发声效果。
如图82中所示，声道隔离结构906用于隔离左右两个激励器400；如图83中设置有两个声道隔离结构906，用于将三个激励器400所在区域间隔开，可以理解的是，本申请实施例可以扩展至更多声道振动区域的隔离度的提升。
在一些实施例中，声道隔离结构906可以为弹性缓冲材质制成，例如，声道隔离结构906可以为弹性缓冲材质制成的隔离条，隔离条设置在相邻的两个激励器400之间。其中，相邻的两个激励器400之间的隔离条的个数可以为一个或多个，例如，在图82中，相邻两个激励器400之间的隔离条的个数为三个。
在一些实施例中，考虑到填充凸起901的数量为多个时，存在安装工艺难度复杂的问题，为了优化此问题，可以通过声道隔离结构906将多个填充凸起901连接为一体，例如，可以使声道隔离结构906与对应的填充凸起901一体成型，这样，可以有效降低填充凸起901的安装难度。
在一些实施例中，相邻声道隔离结构906上的填充凸起901可以交错排布(如图82中所示)，这样，可以使得振动在声道隔离结构906得到有效衰减，以进一步优化各声道之间的语音隔离度，降低各声道振动区域之间的振动影响，从而提升显示设备的发声效果。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例也可以扩展至声道隔离结构906与多个第二弹性支撑件900为一体成型，这样，可以减低多个第二弹性支撑件900的安装工艺的难度。
其中，请参阅图56至图59，背板300包括背板本体310，背板本体310用于承托背光板210以及显示面板100，背板300还包括第一侧板320，第一侧板320沿背板本体310的边缘延伸，并朝向显示面板100的一侧凸出背板本体310，即第一侧板320凸出背板本体310的前侧，这样，第一侧板320围设在背光板210以及显示面板100的周向的外侧。
后壳500包括后壳本体510和第二侧板520，第二侧板520沿后壳本体510的边缘延伸，并朝向显示面板100的一侧凸出后壳本体510，也就是说后壳本体510位于背板本体310的后侧，第二侧板520凸出后壳本体510的前侧，第二侧板520围设在第一侧板320的外侧。
这样，背板本体310和后壳本体510围成出音腔体Q，部分激励器本体410伸入出音腔体Q内，即振动片430位于背板本体310与后壳本体510之间。
其中，出音口P可以形成在后壳本体510上或第二侧板520上。在一些实施例中，出音口P位于第一侧板320和第二侧板520之间。
其中，出音口P可以沿显示设备10的周向延伸，即在显示设备10的四个侧边均构成出音口P。
或者，出音口P可以设置在某一侧边的部分位置处。例如谐振腔X的开口位于左侧时，谐振腔X开口的延伸长度小于显示设备10左侧侧边的长度。也就是说，第一侧板320和第二侧板520的部分位置处未设置封闭结构时，该位置处的第一侧板320和第二侧板520 之间具有间隙，该间隙构成出音口P。出音口P的设置位置以及延伸长度可根据需要进行设置，例如，显示设备10的天侧、地侧、左侧以及右侧均设置一个出音口P。
可以理解的，当第一侧板320和第二侧板520的部分位置未设置出音口P时，该部分位置处的第一侧板320和第二侧板520之间的间隙仍需要进行封闭处理，例如胶塞或者在第一侧板320或第二侧板520设置凸出的弯折部，以避免灰尘等异物进入背板300和后壳500之间的间隙内。
根据第一侧板320以及第二侧板520的凸出方向不同，出音口P可朝向不同方向。例如，当第一侧板320和第二侧板520均沿显示设备10的厚度方向凸出时，出音口P朝向显示设备10的前方(如图56至图58所示)。当第二侧板520沿显示设备10的侧方凸出时，出音口P可朝向侧前方(如图59所示)。
考虑到显示设备10的尺寸较大，在一些实施例中，请参阅图2至图4，显示设备10还包括多个第二粘接件820，第二粘接件820可以为双面胶、泡棉等。多个第二粘接件820间隔设置，用于连接背光板板体211和背板300，以使背光板板体211与背板300之间的不同位置的间距均位于预设范围内，也就是说，背光板板体211的不同位置处具有较为均匀的振动幅度，避免背光板210振动过程中生成杂音。
且通过设置第二粘接件820，还可以对背光板210构成限位，避免显示设备10组装完成后，背光板210发生变形，并影响背光板210振动发声。
考虑到背板300的硬度较大，在一些实施例中，第二粘接件820的硬度小于第一粘接件810的硬度，即第二粘接件820的硬度较小，这样，既可以对背光板210构成限位，又会给背光板210留有振动起伏的空间，避免影响背光板210的低频响应。
其中，第二粘接件820可以呈点状间隔分布(未示出)。在一些实施例中，请参阅图2，多个激励器400沿水平方向间隔设置，第二粘接件820可以呈条状，并沿竖直方向延伸，此时，位于该第二粘接件820两侧的激励器400对对方的影响较小。即第二粘接件820左侧激励器400振动时，位于第二粘接件820右侧的背光板210可不在左侧激励器400的带动下振动。
可以理解的，第二粘接件820的延伸尺寸可与显示设备10的高度相同。
在一些实施例中，根据显示设备10的尺寸，例如显示设备10的尺寸较大时，还可以设置沿水平方向延伸的多个第二粘接件820，本实施例不对第二粘接件820的延伸长度、延伸方向进行设置。
最后应说明的是：以上各实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案，而非对其限制；尽管参照前述各实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明，本领域的普通技术人员应当理解：其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改，或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换；而这些修改或者替换，并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。

Claims (40)

  1. 一种显示设备，包括：
    显示面板，用于显示图像信息；
    背光模组，所述背光模组包括背光板和光学膜组件，所述背光板包括背光板板体和光源，所述显示面板位于所述光学膜组件的出光侧，所述背光板位于所述光学膜组件的入光侧，所述显示面板的边缘与所述背光板板体的边缘连接，以使所述显示面板与所述背光板板体之间形成气体层，所述光源位于所述气体层内；
    背板，所述背板设置在所述背光模组的背离所述显示面板的一侧，用于支撑所述背光模组与所述显示面板；
    激励器，所述激励器包括激励器本体和致动件，所述致动件与所述背光板板体连接，用于带动所述背光板板体振动，并经由所述气体层将所述背光板板体的振动传递至所述显示面板，以带动所述显示面板振动发声。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备，所述显示面板的边缘与所述背光板板体的边缘密封连接，以使所述气体层密闭。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备，所述显示面板的边缘与所述背光板板体的边缘的连接位置处具有导气通道，所述导气通道连通所述气体层的内外两侧；
    所述导气通道具有等效长度和等效内径，所述等效长度大于或等于等效内径的3倍。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还包括第二弹性支撑件，所述第二弹性支撑件的一端与所述背光板板体连接，另一端与所述光学膜组件抵接。
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还包括后壳，所述后壳位于所述背板的背离所述显示面板的一侧；
    所述致动件与所述后壳相连，以带动所述后壳振动发声。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的显示设备，所述后壳设有不规则几何形状的第二加强筋。
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的显示设备，所述后壳包括多个相互连接的子后壳，多个所述子后壳并列设置。
  8. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的显示设备，所述激励器还包括振动片，所述振动片与所述致动件连接，所述振动片被配置为在所述致动件的带动下振动发声。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还设有高频扬声器，被配置为发出高频声波。
  10. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还包括加强板，所述加强板贴装在所述背光板板体的背离所述显示面板的一侧，所述激励器与所述加强板连接，所述加强板的阻尼大于所述背光板板体的阻尼。
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还包括多个间隔设置的第二弹性支撑件；所述第二弹性支撑件弹性抵压在所述背光板与所述光学膜组件之间，以将所述背光板的振动传递至所述显示面板。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的显示设备，多个所述第二弹性支撑件围设在所述激励器本体的外侧；
    多个所述第二弹性支撑件呈环状或放射状排布在所述激励器本体的外侧。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的显示设备，所述第二弹性支撑件在自然状态下沿所述显示面板垂向的高度，从靠近所述激励器本体的一侧到远离所述激励器本体的一侧逐渐减小，且所述第二弹性支撑件在自然状态下沿所述显示面板垂向的高度大于其对应位置处所述气体层的最大间距；
    和/或，所述第二弹性支撑件的分布密度和单个所述第二弹性支撑件的支撑刚度中的至少一者，从靠近所述激励器本体的一侧到远离所述激励器本体的一侧逐渐减小；
    和/或，单个所述第二弹性支撑件的硬度和单个所述第二弹性支撑件的横截面积的至少 一者，从靠近所述激励器本体的一侧到远离所述激励器本体的一侧逐渐减小。
  14. 根据权利要求11或12所述的显示设备，所述背光板上设有多个光源；
    所述第二弹性支撑件的至少部分结构为透明的导光部，所述导光部被配置为将所述光源发出的光向所述显示面板传导。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的显示设备，所述第二弹性支撑件包裹于所述光源的外侧，且所述导光部位于所述光源和所述显示面板之间。
  16. 根据权利要求11或12所述的显示设备，所述光学膜组件包括依次堆叠的扩散膜、荧光膜和增亮膜，所述扩散膜设置在朝向所述背光板的一侧；
    所述显示设备还包括防磨损件，所述防磨损件设置在所述扩散膜与所述荧光膜之间，以使所述扩散膜与所述荧光膜间隔设置。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的显示设备，所述防磨损件与所述荧光膜的接触面为弧面，所述弧面朝向所述荧光膜的一侧凸出。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的显示设备，所述防磨损件包括多个依次堆叠的第一光处理层，每个所述第一光处理层的折射率不等设置。
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的显示设备，所述防磨损件包括第二光处理层和光学件，所述第二光处理层的个数为两个，两个所述第二光处理层间隔设置并分别贴装在所述扩散膜与所述荧光膜上；两个所述第二光处理层的边缘通过所述光学件相连，用于对光线进行朝向所述荧光膜一侧反射。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的显示设备，两个所述第二光处理层之间还设有滤光件，所述滤光件与所述第二光处理层间隔设置，用于将光线朝向所述扩散膜一侧反射。
  21. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备，所述背光板为至少两个，所述背光板相互拼接且所述背光板被配置为向所述显示面板提供背光光源；
    所述显示设备还包括发声组件，所述发声组件包括至少一个所述激励器，所述激励器设置在所述背光板的背离所述显示面板的一侧；
    所述显示设备还包括多个第二弹性支撑件，多个所述第二弹性支撑件设置于所述气体层内，所述第二弹性支撑件连接于所述背光板和所述显示面板之间，以将所述背光板的振动传递至所述显示面板；所述第二弹性支撑件对所述显示面板的支撑强度随所述第二弹性支撑件和所述激励器之间的距离增大而减小。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的显示设备，多个所述第二弹性支撑件围绕所述激励器排布。
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的显示设备，多个所述第二弹性支撑件之间的排布间距随所述第二弹性支撑件和所述激励器之间的距离增大而增大；和/或，各个所述第二弹性支撑件的对所述显示面板的支撑强度随所述第二弹性支撑件和所述激励器的距离增大而减小。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的显示设备，各个所述第二弹性支撑件满足如下至少一个条件：
    所述第二弹性支撑件在平行于所述显示面板方向上的横截面积随所述第二弹性支撑件和所述激励器的距离增大而减小；
    所述第二弹性支撑件的刚度随所述第二弹性支撑件和所述激励器之间的距离增大而减小；
    所述第二弹性支撑件过盈连接在所述背光板和所述显示面板之间，且所述第二弹性支撑件和所述背光板之间在垂直于所述背光板方向上的过盈量随所述第二弹性支撑件和所述激励器的距离增大而减小。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的显示设备，所述第二弹性支撑件在自然状态下沿垂直于所述背光板方向的高度，从靠近所述激励器的一侧到远离所述激励器的一侧逐渐减小。
  26. 根据权利要求21或22所述的显示设备，多个所述第二弹性支撑件呈放射状排列 于所述激励器的周向外侧。
  27. 根据权利要求21或22所述的显示设备，所述激励器为至少两个，且至少两个所述激励器沿和所述显示面板平行的方向间隔设置，多个所述第二弹性支撑件包括至少两个振动传递件组，各所述振动传递件组中的第二弹性支撑件围设在对应的所述激励器外侧。
  28. 根据权利要求21或22所述的显示设备，所述背光板面向所述显示面板的一侧设置有多个光源，且多个所述光源间隔设置，所述第二弹性支撑件位于多个所述光源之间的间隙中。
  29. 根据权利要求21或22所述的显示设备，所述第二弹性支撑件为硅胶件或橡胶件。
  30. 根据权利要求21或22所述的显示设备，所述发声组件还包括加强板，所述加强板贴合设置于所述背光板背离所述显示面板的一侧，所述激励器设置在所述加强板背离所述背光板的一侧。
  31. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还包括填充凸起，设置在所述气体层内，且所述填充凸起位于所述光源的直射光照区域之外。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的显示设备，所述光源为多个，多个所述光源间隔设置在所述背光板板体面向所述显示面板的一侧；所述填充凸起与所述背光板板体连接。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的显示设备，所述填充凸起为凸出于所述背光板板体板面的凸起；
    所述凸起的凸出高度小于所述气体层的厚度，且小于所述光源凸出于所述背光板板体板面的高度。
  34. 根据权利要求31-33中任一项所述的显示设备，所述填充凸起为多个，多个所述填充凸起在所述背光板上呈阵列排布，且与所述光源间隔设置。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的显示设备，以所述激励器为中心，靠近所述激励器的填充凸起的高度至远离所述激励器的填充凸起的高度逐渐减小。
  36. 根据权利要求31-33中任一项所述的显示设备，从所述背光板板体朝向所述显示面板的延伸方向，所述填充凸起的截面尺寸逐渐减小。
  37. 根据权利要求32所述的显示设备，所述显示设备还包括填充层，所述填充层设置在所述背光板板体面向所述显示面板的一侧，并与所述背光板板体连接，所述填充凸起间隔设置在所述填充层上，所述填充凸起和所述光源均凸出所述填充层面向所述显示面板的表面。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的显示设备，所述填充层在所述背光板板体上的投影覆盖所述背光板板体。
  39. 根据权利要求31-33中任一项所述的显示设备，所述填充凸起的表面设置有反光层，所述反光层覆盖所述填充凸起的表面。
  40. 根据权利要求32所述的显示设备，所述填充凸起的第一端与所述背光板板体固定连接，所述填充凸起的第二端与所述显示面板抵接，所述填充凸起被配置为支撑所述显示面板。
PCT/CN2023/082449 2022-03-21 2023-03-20 显示设备 WO2023179526A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210281470.4 2022-03-21
CN202210279174.0 2022-03-21
CN202210281470 2022-03-21
CN202210279174 2022-03-21
CN202221622229.5U CN217543601U (zh) 2022-03-21 2022-06-27 显示设备
CN202221622229.5 2022-06-27
CN202221634167.XU CN217543607U (zh) 2022-03-21 2022-06-28 显示设备
CN202221634167.X 2022-06-28
CN202210756231.XA CN114924438B (zh) 2022-03-21 2022-06-30 显示设备
CN202210756231.X 2022-06-30

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023179526A1 WO2023179526A1 (zh) 2023-09-28
WO2023179526A9 true WO2023179526A9 (zh) 2023-11-02

Family

ID=82815065

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/081856 WO2023179446A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-16 显示设备
PCT/CN2023/081853 WO2023179444A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-16 显示设备
PCT/CN2023/081855 WO2023179445A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-16 显示设备
PCT/CN2023/082449 WO2023179526A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-20 显示设备
PCT/CN2023/082877 WO2023179621A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-21 显示设备

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/081856 WO2023179446A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-16 显示设备
PCT/CN2023/081853 WO2023179444A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-16 显示设备
PCT/CN2023/081855 WO2023179445A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-16 显示设备

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/082877 WO2023179621A1 (zh) 2022-03-21 2023-03-21 显示设备

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (55) CN117590643A (zh)
WO (5) WO2023179446A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117590643A (zh) * 2022-03-21 2024-02-23 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示设备
WO2023179080A1 (zh) * 2022-03-21 2023-09-28 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示设备

Family Cites Families (65)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU754818B2 (en) * 1998-07-03 2002-11-28 New Transducers Limited Resonant panel-form loudspeaker
JP3886391B2 (ja) * 2002-02-15 2007-02-28 シャープ株式会社 カード型装置、及び、それを備えた電子機器
JP4503491B2 (ja) * 2005-05-20 2010-07-14 シャープ株式会社 液晶パネルスピーカ
JP4355860B2 (ja) * 2005-09-27 2009-11-04 カシオ計算機株式会社 画像表示モジュール
JP2007189604A (ja) * 2006-01-16 2007-07-26 Authentic Ltd パネル型スピーカ
JP2010526478A (ja) * 2007-05-03 2010-07-29 アギア システムズ インコーポレーテッド 集積オーディオビジュアル出力デバイス
KR101617485B1 (ko) * 2008-12-05 2016-05-02 도판 인사츠 가부시키가이샤 광학 부품, 조명 장치 및 표시 장치
KR20110058338A (ko) * 2009-11-26 2011-06-01 엘지전자 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
JP2012105021A (ja) * 2010-11-09 2012-05-31 Sony Corp スピーカー装置
JP5717675B2 (ja) * 2012-03-02 2015-05-13 シャープ株式会社 表示装置、及びテレビ受信装置
CN102913825B (zh) * 2012-11-02 2015-07-01 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种发光单元、背光模组及显示装置
KR101383702B1 (ko) * 2012-12-12 2014-04-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시 장치 유닛
JP2017163468A (ja) * 2016-03-11 2017-09-14 パナソニックＩｐマネジメント株式会社 スピーカ装置、および、映像表示装置
KR101704517B1 (ko) * 2016-03-28 2017-02-09 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 패널 진동형 음향 발생 표시 장치
KR101817102B1 (ko) * 2016-11-30 2018-01-10 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 패널 진동형 음향 발생 표시 장치
KR20170114471A (ko) * 2016-04-05 2017-10-16 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 유기발광 표시 장치
KR102266209B1 (ko) * 2017-04-29 2021-06-16 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
KR102284718B1 (ko) * 2017-05-31 2021-07-30 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
CN109151677A (zh) * 2017-06-28 2019-01-04 北京太和开元科技有限公司 发声装置
KR101919454B1 (ko) * 2017-07-31 2018-11-16 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치 및 이를 이용한 컴퓨팅 장치
KR102437513B1 (ko) * 2017-08-10 2022-08-26 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
KR102320359B1 (ko) * 2017-08-16 2021-11-01 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
CN207067607U (zh) * 2017-08-21 2018-03-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种背光源及显示模组、显示装置
CN109256070A (zh) * 2017-09-11 2019-01-22 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 一种屏幕自发声的平板显示装置
KR102356904B1 (ko) * 2017-09-13 2022-01-27 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
KR102445686B1 (ko) * 2017-12-11 2022-09-20 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
KR102455501B1 (ko) * 2017-12-20 2022-10-14 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
KR102458174B1 (ko) * 2017-12-28 2022-10-21 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 전자 기기
KR102612609B1 (ko) * 2017-12-29 2023-12-08 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 표시장치
WO2019212089A1 (ko) * 2018-05-03 2019-11-07 엘지전자 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
KR102650344B1 (ko) * 2018-05-03 2024-03-25 엘지전자 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
CN208314412U (zh) * 2018-05-14 2019-01-01 东莞市银泰丰光学科技有限公司 一种导电发声的背光模组
KR102552930B1 (ko) * 2018-06-27 2023-07-07 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 패널 하부 부재 및 이를 포함하는 표시 장치
CN109246560B (zh) * 2018-08-13 2020-05-22 歌尔股份有限公司 发声装置
KR102080213B1 (ko) * 2018-11-02 2020-04-13 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 표시장치
KR102628489B1 (ko) * 2018-11-15 2024-01-22 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
EP3859981A4 (en) * 2018-11-16 2021-11-10 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. MOBILE DEVICE
CN109581713B (zh) * 2018-12-15 2022-01-25 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 液晶显示模组、液晶显示装置及电子设备
CN111383563B (zh) * 2018-12-31 2022-07-08 乐金显示有限公司 显示装置
CN110047392B (zh) * 2019-03-11 2021-02-02 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 一种显示装置
CN111698620A (zh) * 2019-03-14 2020-09-22 歌尔股份有限公司 一种电子设备
CN110189632B (zh) * 2019-05-23 2022-06-03 云谷（固安）科技有限公司 一种显示发声面板
CN110109216A (zh) * 2019-05-24 2019-08-09 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 一种背光模组、显示装置
US11317199B2 (en) * 2019-05-28 2022-04-26 Apple Inc. Vented acoustic transducers, and related methods and systems
CN117292611A (zh) * 2019-06-17 2023-12-26 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示装置及可发声屏幕
CN112104958B (zh) * 2019-06-17 2023-05-05 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示装置及电磁激励器
CN114967313B (zh) * 2019-06-17 2023-11-03 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示装置、发声基板以及投影屏幕
CN112104957A (zh) * 2019-06-17 2020-12-18 海信视像科技股份有限公司 电子设备
KR20210048345A (ko) * 2019-10-23 2021-05-03 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
CN210835567U (zh) * 2019-10-23 2020-06-23 青岛海信激光显示股份有限公司 投影系统及投影屏幕
CN210894982U (zh) * 2019-10-23 2020-06-30 青岛海信激光显示股份有限公司 投影系统及投影屏幕
CN114143674A (zh) * 2020-09-04 2022-03-04 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示装置
KR20210133650A (ko) * 2020-04-29 2021-11-08 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 디스플레이 장치
CN111491242A (zh) * 2020-05-26 2020-08-04 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种显示面板和显示装置
CN111586534B (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-08-31 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 屏幕发声单元及其制造方法、显示装置
CN113973251A (zh) * 2020-07-22 2022-01-25 华一声学股份有限公司 整合发声装置的面板模块及显示设备
JPWO2022024763A1 (zh) * 2020-07-28 2022-02-03
CN111862818B (zh) * 2020-07-31 2022-11-25 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 显示模组、显示装置及制备方法
CN114071336A (zh) * 2020-08-06 2022-02-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种发声单元和终端
CN112601166A (zh) * 2020-12-14 2021-04-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 屏幕、电子设备及屏幕制备方法
CN214756907U (zh) * 2021-06-11 2021-11-16 海信视像科技股份有限公司 发声设备和激励器
CN215268711U (zh) * 2021-06-11 2021-12-21 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示装置
CN113851049B (zh) * 2021-09-23 2023-10-10 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种发声显示装置
CN113891232A (zh) * 2021-09-28 2022-01-04 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种发声装置及其制备方法、显示装置
CN117590643A (zh) * 2022-03-21 2024-02-23 海信视像科技股份有限公司 显示设备

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN217543609U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN117572681A (zh) 2024-02-20
CN217718365U (zh) 2022-11-01
WO2023179526A1 (zh) 2023-09-28
CN217425893U (zh) 2022-09-13
CN117590645A (zh) 2024-02-23
CN217543605U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN117590644A (zh) 2024-02-23
WO2023179445A1 (zh) 2023-09-28
CN217443699U (zh) 2022-09-16
CN217543603U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN117784469A (zh) 2024-03-29
CN218547180U (zh) 2023-02-28
CN117631367A (zh) 2024-03-01
CN117631366A (zh) 2024-03-01
CN115128868A (zh) 2022-09-30
CN217543606U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN217425892U (zh) 2022-09-13
CN115145074B (zh) 2024-03-29
CN219715879U (zh) 2023-09-19
CN217543604U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN217443701U (zh) 2022-09-16
CN117631370A (zh) 2024-03-01
CN117687239A (zh) 2024-03-12
CN117687240A (zh) 2024-03-12
CN217467422U (zh) 2022-09-20
CN219715880U (zh) 2023-09-19
CN217467423U (zh) 2022-09-20
CN117631371A (zh) 2024-03-01
CN115145074A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN117631368A (zh) 2024-03-01
CN217543601U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN217443700U (zh) 2022-09-16
CN217386076U (zh) 2022-09-06
CN117666201A (zh) 2024-03-08
CN217425891U (zh) 2022-09-13
CN117631369A (zh) 2024-03-01
CN219695593U (zh) 2023-09-15
WO2023179445A9 (zh) 2023-11-02
CN117666202A (zh) 2024-03-08
WO2023179621A1 (zh) 2023-09-28
CN217543602U (zh) 2022-10-04
WO2023179444A9 (zh) 2023-11-02
CN114994968A (zh) 2022-09-02
CN117590641A (zh) 2024-02-23
CN217425894U (zh) 2022-09-13
CN217543607U (zh) 2022-10-04
WO2023179444A1 (zh) 2023-09-28
CN219499529U (zh) 2023-08-08
WO2023179446A1 (zh) 2023-09-28
CN115128868B (zh) 2024-01-26
CN114924438B (zh) 2024-02-13
CN219872030U (zh) 2023-10-20
CN114924438A (zh) 2022-08-19
CN115145075B (zh) 2024-03-26
WO2023179446A9 (zh) 2023-11-02
CN117666200A (zh) 2024-03-08
CN117590643A (zh) 2024-02-23
CN217543610U (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115268138A (zh) 2022-11-01
CN217467421U (zh) 2022-09-20
CN115145075A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN217443702U (zh) 2022-09-16
CN115022782A (zh) 2022-09-06
CN117608125A (zh) 2024-02-27
CN117590642A (zh) 2024-02-23
CN217521464U (zh) 2022-09-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102560398B1 (ko) 표시장치
CN114913791B (zh) 显示装置
WO2023179526A9 (zh) 显示设备
KR102266209B1 (ko) 디스플레이 장치
KR102612609B1 (ko) 표시장치
KR102356904B1 (ko) 디스플레이 장치
WO2023179080A1 (zh) 显示设备
CN116828138A (zh) 显示设备
CN115474135A (zh) 显示装置
CN118112877A (zh) 一种投影屏幕及投影显示设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23773774

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1